800 06306_V128FBPN Ii RevB Vista 128fbpn Installation Manual

User Manual: vista-128fbpn-installation-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

A-

-1

Commercial Fire and Burglary

Partitioned Security System with Scheduling

Installation and Setup Guide

800-06306 4/10 Rev. B

iii

Table of Contents

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Commercial Fire and Burglary............................................................................................................. i

General Requirements ......................................................................................................................................ix

Programming Field Settings for UL864 Compliance ......................................................................................ix

SECTION 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1

SIA Installations............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

About the VISTA-128FBPN ........................................................................................................................... 1-1

Features .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Guidelines for Wiring a System..................................................................................................................... 1-3

SECTION 2 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Theory of Partitioning .................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Setting-Up a Partitioned System................................................................................................................... 2-1

Common Lobby Logic ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Master Keypad Setup and Operation............................................................................................................ 2-3

SECTION 3 ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Mounting the Control Cabinet....................................................................................................................... 3-1

Installing the Cabinet Lock ........................................................................................................................... 3-1

Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines....................................................................................................... 3-1

Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines ............................................................................................. 3-2

Commercial Fire Guidelines .......................................................................................................................... 3-2

Installing the Control's Circuit Board........................................................................................................... 3-3

Installing the Keypads ................................................................................................................................... 3-3

Installing External Sounders......................................................................................................................... 3-4

Auxiliary Relay Connections.......................................................................................................................... 3-8

Telephone Line Connections .......................................................................................................................... 3-9

Main Dialer Connections................................................................................................................................ 3-9

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8 ....................................................................................... 3-10

Installing V-Plex Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-14

Wireless Zone Expansion ............................................................................................................................. 3-17

Installing Output Devices ............................................................................................................................ 3-21

Installing a Remote Keyswitch .................................................................................................................... 3-22

Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder (For Commercial Burglary use only) ............................................ 3-23

Communicators Connected to the ECP ....................................................................................................... 3-24

Event Log Connections................................................................................................................................. 3-25

Connecting the Transformer........................................................................................................................ 3-26

Earth Ground Connections .......................................................................................................................... 3-26

Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load .......................................................................................... 3-27

Determining the Size of the Standby Battery ............................................................................................ 3-29

SECTION 4 ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Program Modes ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode ................................................................................................... 4-1

Data Field Programming Mode ..................................................................................................................... 4-1

#93 Menu Mode Programming ...................................................................................................................... 4-2

Zone Number Designations............................................................................................................................ 4-4

Table of Contents

Zone Response Type Definitions.................................................................................................................... 4-6

Zone Input Type Definitions .......................................................................................................................... 4-8

Programming for Communicator................................................................................................................... 4-9

SECTION 5 ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1

About Data Field Programming .................................................................................................................... 5-1

Programming Data Fields.............................................................................................................................. 5-1

SECTION 6 ...................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Time Window Definitions............................................................................................................................... 6-2

Open/Close Schedules Definitions ................................................................................................................. 6-3

Scheduling Menu Mode .................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Time Windows................................................................................................................................................. 6-5

Daily Open/Close Schedules........................................................................................................................... 6-6

Holiday Schedules .......................................................................................................................................... 6-6

Time-Driven Events ....................................................................................................................................... 6-7

Limitation of Access Schedules.................................................................................................................... 6-11

Temporary Schedules ................................................................................................................................... 6-12

User Scheduling Menu Mode ....................................................................................................................... 6-14

SECTION 7 ...................................................................................................................................... 7-1

General Information....................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Unattended Download (For Burglary Use Only).......................................................................................... 7-1

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 7-3

Scheduled Download (For Burglary Use Only)............................................................................................. 7-3

Direct-Wire Downloading............................................................................................................................. 7-16

Telco Handoff ................................................................................................................................................ 7-16

SECTION 8 ...................................................................................................................................... 8-1

General Information....................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Setting the Time and Date............................................................................................................................. 8-1

SECTION 9 ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1

General Information....................................................................................................................................... 9-1

User Codes and Levels of Authority.............................................................................................................. 9-1

Multiple Partition Access............................................................................................................................... 9-2

Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ............................................................................................. 9-3

Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ......................................................................................... 9-4

Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ........................................................................................... 9-4

Exiting the User Edit Mode ........................................................................................................................... 9-4

SECTION 10 .................................................................................................................................. 10-1

Battery Test .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

Dialer Test..................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)................................................................................................................... 10-1

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)................................................................................................. 10-1

Burglary Walk-Test (.................................................................................................................................... 10-2

Armed Burglary System Test ...................................................................................................................... 10-3

Testing Wireless Transmitters .................................................................................................................... 10-3

Trouble Conditions ....................................................................................................................................... 10-4

To the Installer ............................................................................................................................................. 10-5

APPENDIX A ...................................................................................................................................A-1

UL Installation Requirements.......................................................................................................................A-1

Table of Contents

UL864/NFPA Local Fire.................................................................................................................................A-1

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire .............................................................................A-1

Commercial Burglary Requirements.............................................................................................................A-1

UL609 Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault.............................................................A-2

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm .........................................................................................A-2

UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm .....................................................................................................A-2

APPENDIX B .................................................................................................................................. B-1

APPENDIX C .................................................................................................................................. C-1

APPENDIX D.................................................................................................................................. D-1

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES .................................................................................................D-1

Event Log Alpha Descriptors .........................................................................................................................D-2

List of Figures

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Figure 1-1: Isolating Fire Devices from Burglary Devices.....................................................................................................1-4

Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock...............................................................................................................................................3-1

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ........................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-3: Commercial Fire Installation Considerations....................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-4: Mounting the PC Board.......................................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-5: Keypad Connections to Control Panel ................................................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-6. ECP Isolator Wiring .............................................................................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-7: Intentionally Left Blank......................................................................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation.....................................................................................................3-8

Figure 3-9: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset.............................................................................................3-8

Figure 3-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for zone 2 use terminals 17 and 18).......................................................3-11

Figure 3-11: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors..................................................................................................................................3-12

Figure 3-12. Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8 ..........................................................................................................3-13

Figure 3-13: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision..................................................................3-13

Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision....................................................................3-14

Figure 3-15: Polling Loop Connections to the Control Panel..............................................................................................3-16

Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module .......................................................................3-16

Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules .......................................................................3-17

Figure 3-18: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection ........................................................................................3-19

Figure 3-19: 5881/5883 RF Receiver (cover removed).........................................................................................................3-19

Figure 3-20: 4204 Relay Module ..........................................................................................................................................3-21

Figure 3-21: 4204CF Relay Module .....................................................................................................................................3-22

Figure 3-22: Remote Keyswitch Wiring...............................................................................................................................3-23

Figure 3-23: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring.....................................................................................................................3-23

Figure 3-24: Wiring Communicator to Keypad Terminals .................................................................................................3-25

Figure 3-25: Connecting the Backup Batteries ....................................................................................................................3-30

Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections.............................................................................................................7-16

VISTA-128FBPN Summary of Connections Diagram ..................................................................................Inside Back Cover

vii

Conventions Used in This Manual

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols (icons).

UL These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installin

this system for

a UL Listed application.

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the

installation, and that, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or

could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also

denotes warnings about physical harm to the user

ZONE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to

alpha keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.

✴00 Additional system options are programmed via data fields, which are indicated by a “star”

(✴) followed by the data field number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:

Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent Honeywell products.

viii

UL864 (Commercial Fire) Compliance

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Requirements

The VISTA-128FBPN control panels provide features that allow the system to meet UL864 Commercial Fire

requirements. To meet these requirements, follow the guidelines outlined in this section.

• The reporting of bypassed points to the central station must be enabled in Report Code Programming mode.

• Fire alarm notification circuits must be supervised (e.g., supervisory zones 970 and 971 for Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs)

• Only one relay of the 4204CF can be programmed for a NAC. If the 4204CF relay is programmed as a NAC, the stop

action must be programmed as a zone type 62, Bell 2 Timeout.

• Output devices are not intended for overriding automatic fire and building functions.

• Line cut detection must be enabled for both the main and backup phone lines (supervisory zones 974 and 975).

• Access Control Devices cannot be used.

• Audio Alarm Verification Devices cannot be used.

• Remote downloading can only be performed if a service person is at the premises.

• All supervision zones for the polling loop, RF receivers, keypads, NAC outputs, and telephone lines that are used, must

be enabled as zone type 19 (24-hour trouble).

Programming Field Settings for UL864 Compliance

NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED

PARTIES

This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements

in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL864, certain programming features

or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below.

Program feature or option Permitted in

UL864? Y/N

Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

✱08 TEMPORAL SIREN

PULSE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Not used at this time. Must

be set to “0” (disable).

✱13 ALARM SOUNDER

(BELL) TIMEOUT

Y Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2

minutes. 00 = no timeout.

Must be set to “3” (Minimum

of 6 minutes).

✱14 TRIGGER OR RS232 N 0 = trigger

1 = RS232 input

Must be set to “0”.

✱17 AC LOSS KEYPAD

SOUNDING

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enabled).

✱20 VIP MODULE

PHONE CODE

N 1-9 = first digit of access code

∗ or # = second digit of access

code (enter # +11 for “∗”, or #

+12 for “#”).

To disable enter 0 for the 1st

digit.

Not used. Must be set to “00”.

✱22 KEYPAD PANIC

ENABLES (PARTITION

SPECIFIC)

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “000” for

partition 1 in fire systems.

✱23 MULTIPLE

ALARMS (PARTITION

SPECIFIC)

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enabled).

✱26 INTELLIGENT TEST

REPORTING

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

Program feature or option Permitted in

UL864? Y/N

Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

✱27 TEST REPORT

INTERVAL

Y Enter 0001-9999 for the test

report interval in hours.

Enter 0000 for test reporting.

Must be set to “0024”

(Maximum 24 hours)

✱28 POWERUP IN

PREVIOUS STATE

Y 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable).

✱37 DOWNLOAD

COMMAND ENABLES

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” for all

entries (disable).

✱41 NORMALLY

CLOSED OR EOLR

(ZONES 3-8)

N 0 = EOLR supervision

1 = N.C. loops

Must be set to “0” (EOLR

Supervision).

✱42 DIAL TONE PAUSE Y Enter the wait time for dial

tone detection:

0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds;

2 = 30 seconds.

Must be set to “0” (5 seconds).

✱44 RING DETECTION

COUNT

N Enter 00 to disable ring

detection.

Enter 01-14 for ring counts of

1-14.

Enter 15 to select Answering

Machine Defeat Mode

Must be set to “00” (disable).

✱54 UNATTENDED

MODE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

✱56 DYNAMIC

SIGNALING DELAY

Y Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds.

Must be set to “6” (90

seconds).

✱77 AUTO TROUBLE

RESTORE

Y 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable).

✱80 ZONE TYPE

RESTORES FOR TYPES

9, 10 & 14

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable) for

zone type 9.

1✱12 PROGRAM

NOTIFICATION SIGNAL

Y 0 = no

1 = yes

Must be set to “1” (yes).

1✱13 SYSTEM SENSOR

REVERSING RELAY

N 0=use neither Zone 1 or Zone

2 inputs

1=use Zone 1 input;

2=use Zone 2 input;

3=use Zone 1 and Zone 2

inputs.

Not Used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱18 AFFECTS LOBBY N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disabled)

for partition 1.

1✱19 ARMS LOBBY N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disabled)

for partition 1.

1✱22 thru 1✱25 CROSS-

ZONING PAIRS (1 – 4)

N Enter 001-128

Enter 000,000 to disable

Must be set to “000,000”

(disabled) for fire zones.

1✱28 RF TRANSMITTER

LOW BATTERY SOUND

N 0 = disarmed state only

1 = both armed and disarmed

states

Must be set to “1” (both

armed and disarmed states).

1✱29 RF TRANSMITTER

LOW BATTERY

REPORTING

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable).

Program feature or option Permitted in Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

UL864? Y/N

1✱30 RF RECEIVER

SUPERVISION CHECK-

IN INTERVAL

N Enter 02–15 times 2 hours (4–

30 hours)

Enter 00 to disable receiver

supervision

Maximum is 02 (4 hours) for

fire installations.

1✱31 RF TRANSMITTER

CHECK-IN INTERVAL

N Enter 02–15 times 2 hours (4–

30 hours)

Enter 00 to disable

transmitter supervision

Maximum is 02 (4 hours) for

fire installations.

1✱35 ACCESS CONTROL

DIALER ENABLES

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Not used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱44 WIRELESS

KEYPAD TAMPER

DETECT

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Not used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱45 EXIT DELAY

SOUNDING (PARTITION

SPECIFIC)

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable)

for partition 1.

1✱48 WIRELESS

KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT

N 0 = none

1-8 = partition number

Not used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱49 SUPPRESS TX

SUPERVISION SOUND

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

1✱53 DISABLE

DOWNLOAD CALLBACK

N 0 = callback required

1 = no callback required

Must be set to “0” (callback

required).

1✱57 5800 RF BUTTON

GLOBAL ARM

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

1✱58 5800 RF BUTTON

FORCE ARM

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

1✱60 ZONE 5 AUDIO

ALARM VERIFICATION

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

1✱69 PRINTER TYPE N 0 = parallel printer

1 = serial printer

Not used.

1✱72 EVENT LOG

PRINTER ONLINE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Not used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱73 PRINTER BAUD

RATE

N 0 = 1200

1 = 300

Not used.

1✱76 CONTROL RELAY

(PART-SPECIFIC)

N 01-96 = relay number

00 = relay not used.

Must be set to “00” (relay not

used) for partition 1.

1✱78 EXTENDED HOME

CONT EVENTS

N 1 = extended

0 = limited

Not used. Must be set to “0”.

1✱79 HOME CONTROL

EVENTS

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Not used. Must be set to “0”

in each entry.

2✱07 AUTO-DISARM

DELAY (PART

SPECIFIC)

N 00 = no delay.

01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56)

delay.

15 = no auto disarming.

Must be set to “15” (no auto

disarming) for partition 1.

2✱18 ENABLE GOTO

FOR THIS PARTITION

(partition-specific)

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable)

for partition 1.

Program feature or option Permitted in Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

xii

UL864? Y/N

2✱21 SUPERVISION

PULSES FOR

COMMUNICATIONS

DEVICE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “00000”

(disable).

2✱22 DISPLAY FIRE

ALARMS OF OTHER

PARTITIONS

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable)

for partition 1.

2✱23 DISPLAY BURG,

PANIC AND CO ALARMS

FOR OTHER

PARTITIONS

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable)

for partition 1.

2✱24 DISPLAY

TROUBLES OF OTHER

PARTITIONS

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable)

for partition 1.

2✱30 THROUGH 2✱88

(PAGER OPTIONS)

N NA Not used. Must be set to “0”.

3✱01 EVENTS DISPLAY

LOCK

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable).

3✱12 ZN TYPE 18 DELAY

USE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

3✱13 FIRE

SUPERVISORY

RESPONSE TO

OPEN/SHORT (APPLIES

TO ZONE TYPE 18)

N 0 = Trouble on open/Supv on

short

1 = Supv on open/Supv on

short

Must be set to “0”.

3✱14 WATERFLOW

ALARM SILENCE

OPTION

N 0 = Silenced by User Code +

OFF

1 = Silenced when zone

restores

Must be set to “0” (Silenced

by User Code + OFF).

3✱16 DELAY FOR ZONE

TYPES 17 & 18

(Waterflow/Supervisory)

N Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds

Enter 00 for no delay

Must be set to 00 (no delay).

3✱18 EXTENDED

DELAY FOR ZONE

TYPES 17 & 18 Multiplies

delay in 3*16 x 4)

N 0 = no extended delay

1 = multiply delay by 4

Must be set to 0 (no extended

delay).

3✱19 AUXILIARY INPUT

ALTERNATE FUNCTION

ENABLE

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to 0 (disable).

3✱20 TRIGGER

OUTPUTS FUNCTION

SELECTION

N 0 = remote keypad sounder

1 = keyswitch LEDs

Must be set to 0 (remote

keypad sounder).

3✱21 MAXIMUM

NUMBER OF DIALER

ATEMPTS

Y 1-8 Must be set at 3, 4 or 5.

3✱50 ZONE TYPE

RESTORE ENABLES

FOR TYPES 16-18

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “1” (enable).

Program feature or option Permitted in Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

xiii

UL864? Y/N

3✱60 BELL 2 & AUX

RELAY TIMEOUT

Y Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2

minutes.

00 = no timeout.

Must be set to “3” (Minimum

of 6 minutes).

3✱82 ENABLE

BURGLARY FEATURES

ON PARTITION 1

N 0 = disable

1 = enable

Must be set to “0” (disable).

RESTRICTION FOR FIRE

RELAYS

Y Yes

Restriction for # 70 must be

set to Yes when

programming fire relays.

NOTE: When there is a conflict between UL864 and CP-01, UL864 will take precedence.

SIA CP-01 Quick Reference Chart

The minimum required system for SIA CP-01 is a UL Listed Control, Keypad and Bell.

Item Feature Range Shipping

Default

SIA Requirement*

*09 Entry Delay # 1 02 – 15 multiplied by 15

seconds

00 = 240 sec (4 minutes)

30 Seconds` At least 30 Seconds **

*10 Exit Delay #1 03 – 15 multiplied by 15

seconds

60 Seconds 60 Seconds

*11 Entry Delay # 2 02 – 15 multiplied by 15

seconds

00 = 240 sec (4 minutes)

30 Seconds At least 30 Seconds **

*12 Exit Delay #2 03 – 15 multiplied by 15

seconds

60 Seconds 60 Seconds

*28 Power Up in

Previous State

0 = no

1 = yes

Yes Yes

*57 Dynamic Signaling

Priority

0 = primary dialer

1 = Communicator as

first reporting destination

0 (primary dialer) 0 (primary dialer)

*84 Swinger Suppression 01= 1 alarm

02= 2 alarms

1 alarm 1 alarm

*88 Abort Window Time

(for non-fire zones)

1 = 15 seconds

2 = 30 seconds

3 = 45 seconds

30 Seconds At least 15 Seconds **

1*21 Exit Time Reset 0=no

1=Resets Exit Delay to

programmed value after

zone is closed and then

faulted prior to end of exit

delay.

1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)

1*22 – 1*25 Cross Zoning Zone 001 – 128

000, 000 = Disabled

Disabled Enabled and two (or

more) zones programmed

1*42 Call Waiting Defeat 0 = no

1 = yes

Disabled (0) Enabled if user has call

waiting

1*61 Abort Verify 0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Enabled Enabled

xiv

Item Feature Range Shipping

Default

SIA Requirement*

Zone

Programming

Auto Stay

Zone, Zone

type 04 has

this feature

enabled by

default

Auto Stay Arm or

Occupied Premises

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

1 (Enabled) Enabled

Zone

Programming

(Abort

Window

Enable)

Abort Window (for

non-fire zones)

0 = no abort window

1 = yes, use abort

window according to *88

selection

1 = yes Yes (all non-fire zones)

Zone

Programming

(Swinger

Suppression

Enable)

Swinger Suppression

Enable

0 = no suppression

1 = yes, suppress alarms

according to *84

selection

Yes (enabled) Yes (enabled (all zones))

Zone

Programming

Tamper

Option

Fire Alarm

Verification

For Zone Response

Type 16 (Fire) tamper

selection must be set to

“0”

Disabled Enabled unless sensors

can self verify

- Exit Time and

Progress

Annunciation/Disable

for Remote Arm (Not

Evaluated for SIA

CP-01)

Always Enabled Enabled Enabled

- Cancel Window 5 minutes Enabled Not required to be

programmable

- Cancel Annunciation

- Keypad displays

“Alarm Cancel” when

report is received

NA Enabled Enabled

- Programmable Cross

Zoning Time

Both zones must be

faulted within 5 minutes

Per

Manufacturer

Per walk path in protected

premises

User

Authority

Level 6

Duress Feature NA Disabled Disabled

* Programming at installation may be subordinate to other UL requirements for the intended application.

** In accordance with UL standards, the combined Entry Delay time and Abort Window cannot exceed 1

minute.

1-1

SECTION 1

General Description

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

About the VISTA-128FBPN

The VISTA-128FBPN is an 8-partition, UL Listed commercial fire and burglary control panel with the following

features:

• Up to 128 zones (hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones)

• Up to 150 user codes

• Supervision of Notification Appliance Circuits, phone lines, keypads, RF receivers, and output devices

• Scheduling capabilities (allows certain operations to be automated)

ULC Scheduling is currently not approved for ULC applications.

The VISTA-128FBPN can interface with the following devices:

• An ECP Communications Device that can send Contact ID messages

Features

Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones

• Provides 8 hardwire zones.

• Supports up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone 1 and zone 2 (32 total).

• Automatically resets 4-wire smoke detectors if the Aux Relay is programmed for smoke reset (3*61 = 2).

• Supports up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.

• Supports up to 119 additional expansion zones using a built-in polling (V-Plex) loop.

• Supports up to 128 wireless zones, fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones.

• Can program burglary zones as silent in the alarm condition (alarm output is silent and the keypad does not display

or sound the alarm).

• Provides three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).

• Full Status (Remote Interactive Service)

Peripherals Devices

• Supports up to 31 addressable devices, (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.).

• Supervises devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay modules) and individual relays (up to 32), as well as system

zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).

• Provides 96 outputs using 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, and V-Plex Relay Modules can activate outputs in

response to system events (alarm condition), at a specific time of day, at random times, and manually using the #70

Relay Command Mode.

• Supports one additional style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuit using a 4204CF.

• Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's eight partitions.

• Can be used with Commercial Fire Listed 24VDC Power Supplies.

Arming/Disarming and Bypassing

• Can arm the system with zones faulted (Vent Zone). These zones are automatically bypassed and can be

programmed to automatically unbypass when the zone restores.

• Can arm with entry/exit and interior type zones faulted (Arm w/Fault). These zones must be restored before the exit

delay expires, otherwise an alarm is generated.

• Vent zones cannot be used in UL installations.

• You must disable the Force Arm option (used in conjunction with the Arm w/Fault option), in UL installations.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

1-2

• Provides global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the user code has access to in one command).

• Can Quick Exit an armed premises without having to disarm and then rearm the system.

• Can be armed in one of three STAY modes or Instant modes, automatically bypassing specific burglary zones

regardless of the zone response type.

• Can automatically bypass specific zones if no one exits the premises after arming (Auto-STAY). Auto-STAY will not

occur if the system is armed via an RF transmitter, scheduling, keyswitch or downloading.

• Can bypass a group of zones with one set of keystrokes.

• Supports Exit Error Logic, whereby the system can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused

by leaving an entry/exit door open. If the system is not subsequently disarmed, faulted entry/exit zone(s) and/or

interior zones are bypassed and the system arms.

• Supports Recent Close report, which is designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 2

minutes after the exit delay has expired.

Partitioning

• Can control 8 separate areas (partitions) independently, each functioning as if it had its own separate control. All

fire zones must be assigned to partition 1.

• Provides a Common Lobby partition, which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition is

armed, and to disarm when the first partition is disarmed.

• Provides a Master partition (9), used for the purpose of viewing the status of all partitions at the same time.

• Can display fire, burglary, panic, and trouble conditions at all other partitions’ keypads (selectable option).

Scheduling

• Can automate system functions, such as arming, disarming, and activation of outputs (e.g., lights).

• Provides access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).

• Provides an End User Output Programming Mode, allowing the user to control outputs.

System Communication

• Provides supervision of the phone lines (main and backup)

• Supports the 5140DLM optional backup dialer for the second phone line.

• Supports ADEMCO Contact ID; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Express; and 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 ADEMCO and

Sescoa/Radionics Low-Speed formats.

The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID communication. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting all

128 zones, as well as openings and closings for all 150 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with the

MX8000 receiver to fully support all new VISTA-128FBPN report codes. If you need to update your MX8000

receiver, contact your distributor.

• Provides the Dialer Queue Report in the event of a loss of communications between the dialer and the central

station, i.e. telco loss. The total events that will be queued up are 128 (91 Burg + 37 Life Safety). A Dialer Queue

Overflow report (E354) will be sent if the report queue goes beyond its limits. Note that: Life Safety includes Fire,

CO, 24 HR Silent/Audible/Auxiliary, and Duress. Life Safety events may go beyond 37 (up to 128) if there are no

Burg events in the queue. If all dialer attempts are exhausted before communication to the central station is

restored, the queue will be cleared.

Downloading

• Supports upload and download capability. (Downloading must be site-initiated for Commercial Fire installations.)

• Can perform unattended downloading (no one at the downloading computer).

• Provides an Installer Unattended Program Mode. This allows the installer to program the download phone number,

subscriber number, and primary central station receiver phone number without entering the normal program mode.

• Can periodically and automatically perform a scheduled download.

• Revision 4.0 and above panels can be downloaded via the 7845i-ent using Compass revision 1.5.8 or above.

UL Downloading is not listed for use in UL installations.

• Can download access control cardholder information.

Section 1 - General Description

1-3

Event Log

• Provides an event log (history log) that can store up to 512 events.

• Can view the event log on an alpha keypad.

Fire Walk-Test Mode

• Provides an automatic test of integrated V-Plex devices that have the automatic test feature.

• Can display all fire zones that remain untested.

• Can log test results in the event log.

• Can report the test results to the central station.

Additional Features

• Provides two style-Y supervised Special Application Notification Appliance Circuits.

• Provides an auxiliary relay (form C) that can activate alarms troubles/supervisories, reset 4-wire smoke detectors, or

as a battery saver (removes power from non-critical loads 4 hours after AC power loss).

• Provides up to 60 installer-defined, custom words that can be used for zone descriptors.

• Provides 35 keypad macro commands (each macro is a series of keypad commands of up to 32 keystrokes) using the

A, B, C, and D keys by partition.

• Provides cross-zone capability, which helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless

its cross-zone is also faulted within a 5-minute period.

• Contains a built-in User Manual, which provides the end user with a brief explanation of the function of a key when

the user presses any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds.

• Provides trigger outputs, which may interface with Communicator equipment or other devices such as keyswitch

LEDs, or printer.

• Provides an option to have trouble and supervisory conditions to automatically clear from the display when the zone

returns to the ready/normal state (entry of Code + OFF is not required).

• Provides Maintenance Signal support for certain smoke detectors (5192SD, 5192SDT, 5193SD, 5193SDT).

At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6160/6160CR-2) must be connected to the system for programming (if you are

using keypad programming), and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program

additional user codes into the system at a later time.

Guidelines for Wiring a System

The installer must keep certain guidelines in mind while installing a system. The Vista-128FBPN contains an ECP bus

and a polling loop bus for connecting Fire and Burglary devices. When installing a Fire ONLY system or Burglary ONLY

system both busses may be used interchangeably. When installing a Commercial Fire and Burglary System all Fire

devices must be isolated from the Burglary devices. This is accomplished by using an isolator as shown in Figure 1-1.

Additionally, in Commercial Fire installations, the primary keypad must be connected to Keypad Port 2 mounted within

20 feet of the control panel, and wired in conduit.

A fault on an SLC may disable all NACs on that circuit therefore only one NAC per SLC circuit may be used.

Synchronization is based on the individual zone output basis only, not between each sync module. There is no

synchronization between the individual sync modules.

Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) must be wired and isolated or Riser Conductors must be installed in accordance

with the survivability from attack by fire requirements in the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

1-4

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

POLLING LOOP

V128FBPN-001-V0

FOR CLARITY OF THIS DRAWING THE ECP BUS IS SHOWN

USING A T-TAP FOR MODULE CONNECTION. ACTUAL T-TAP

CONNECTIONS MUST BE CONTAINED WITHIN THE

ENCLOSURE.

WHEN USING A 4297 FOR ISOLATION, ISOLATED DEVICES

MUST BE EITHER ALL FIRE OR ALL BURGLARY.

NO COMBINATION OF FIRE/BURGLARY DEVICES IS

PERMITTED.

POLLING LOOP TERMINAL 29 CAN BE USED FOR POLLING

LOOP DEVICES THAT ARE USING ONLY 2-WIRE CONNECTIONS.

4297 LOOP

EXTENDER

BURGLARYFIRE

INPUT POLLING

NOTES:

2928

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

COMMUNICATORS

7845i-ent

4204CF

RF RECEIVER

DO NOT CONNECT

IF USING OPTIONAL

AUX POWER

BLACK -

RED +

BLACK -

RED +

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

BLACK -

RED +

YELLOW DATA

GREEN DATA

4190SN

4193SN BLACK -

RED +

4101SN

5192SDT

5193SDT

4208SN

4208SNF

4208U

4204

BURGLARY

KEYPAD

6160

VPLEX-VSI

OUTPUT POLLING

INPUT POLLING

PIR

BLACK -

RED +

BLACK -

RED +

4193

4208SN

4208U

11 12 13 14

VISTA-128FBPN PANEL

USE CABLE

4142TR

(SUPPLIED)

KEYPAD PORT 2 ECP BUS

PRIMARY

KEYPAD

6160CR-2

OUTPUT POLLING

AUX POWER

CANNOT BE

USED ON

"FIRE LOOP"

OPTIONAL POWER

FROM ECP

ISOLATOR

(+) AND (-) OUPUTS

ECP

ISOLATOR

BLACK -

RED +

BLACK -

RED +

ISOLATION OF FIRE AND BURGLARY DEVICES

ON THE ECP BUS

ISOLATION OF FIRE AND BURGLARY DEVICES

ON THE POLLING LOOP

5193SDT

5193SDT (IF USED)

PANEL

AUX POWER

Figure 1-1: Isolating Fire Devices from Burglary Devices

2-1

SECTION 2

Partitioning

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Theory of Partitioning

This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its own control. These areas

are called partitions. A Partitioned system allows the user to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed, or

to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions,

and can be given a different authority level in each.

Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many partitions (1-8) are required.

Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.

Keypads

Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition. It can also be assigned to Partition 9 if

Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup and Operation” later in this section.)

UL In Commercial Fire installations, field 2*18 (Log on from other partitions) must be disabled for partition 1.

Zones

Each zone must be assigned to one partition. The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's

keypad(s).

UL All fire zones must be assigned to partition 1 to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

Users

Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like

to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for

those partitions (when entering user codes).

A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition from another partition's

keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he/she wants to log on to from

another.

A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this partition by causing

arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby Logic” later in this section).

Setting-Up a Partitioned System

The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more information on how to program

the options, see SECTION 4: Programming.

1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).

2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).

3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).

4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.

5. Assign users to partitions.

6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user can log on to (alpha keypad

only).

7. Program partition-specific fields (see the SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions).

Common Lobby Logic

When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building, that shared partition may

be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a

medical building where there are two doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows

explanation).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

2-2

The Common Lobby feature employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two programming

fields determine the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects

Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.

1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby is automatically disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.

1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.

b. Arming a partition that is programmed to arm the lobby causes the system to automatically attempt to arm the

lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or if another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby

cannot be armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.

You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the lobby. Do not enable

field 1*19 without enabling field 1*18.

The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate.

1*18

Affects Lobby

1*19

Arms Lobby

Disarms when

partition disarms?

Attempts to arm

when partition

arms?

Can be armed if

other partitions

disarmed?

0 0 NO NO YES

1 0 YES NO NO

1 1 YES YES NO

0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

Example

Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.

OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2

MAIN ENTRANCE

COMMON LOBBY

V128BP-001-V0

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.

Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.

Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.

NOTE: In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( )

indicate the current status of the other partition when the user

takes action.

Sequence #1:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms

User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change

User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change

User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms

Section 2 – Partitioning

2-3

Sequence #2:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms

User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)

User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change

User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change

Notice that in sequence #1, because Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office #2 is programmed to

affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which

affects the lobby, was still disarmed.

When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to arm the lobby. User #1

would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if

the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building.

Do not assign partition 1 as the common lobby if fire zones are being used in the system. All fire zones must be

assigned to partition 1 to ensure all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Codes with Global Arming

If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the SECTION 9: User Access Codes), the keypad prompts the

user to select the partitions they want to arm. Only the partitions the user has access to are displayed. This allows the

user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in

mind, however, that if a user attempts to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user cannot arm the

lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.

Codes with Non-Global Arming

If a user arms with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation is automatic, as described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming

Common Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby in

one of the following manners:

• Quick-Arm

• Keyswitch

• Wireless Button

• Wireless Keypad

Arming/Disarming Remotely

If a user arms or disarms remotely (through Compass downloading software), the lobby does not automatically follow

another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all

affecting partitions first.

Auto-Arming/Disarming

If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby partition does not

automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby partition

must be scheduled to arm/disarm and must be scheduled as the last partition to arm.

If you are using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods, for the lobby

partition, (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This

causes the lobby to arm last.

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning

keypads as Master keypads for the system.

Assigning any keypad to Partition 9 in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode makes that keypad a Master keypad.

A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful

because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to have to log on to various partitions from one partition's

keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred.

UL In Commercial Fire installations, field 2*18 (Log on from other partitions) must be disabled for partition 1.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

2-4

The following is a typical display:

S Y S T E M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S T A T U S R R N N A T B

Possible status indications include:

A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum C = Comm Fail

I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm T = Trouble

F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter [✴] + Partition No. (e.g., [✴] + [4]). This allows

viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that

partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user

must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access is denied.

The following is displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when a

user logs on from a keypad on Partition 9:

WHSE DISARMED

HIT T FOR FAULTS

Pressing [✴] causes the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):

FAULT 002 LOADING

DOCK WINDOW

Additional zone faults are displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status, press [✴] + Partition No.

The Armed LED on a Master keypad is lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully. The Ready LED is lit only

if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither LED is lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are

ready.

Press [✴] + [0] or [✴] + [9] to return to the master partition. Otherwise, if no keys are pressed for 2 minutes, the system

automatically returns to the master partition

The sounder on a Master keypad reflects the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions. The priority of

the sounds, from most to least critical, is as follows:

1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds

2. Steady burglar alarm sounds

3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)

Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists.

A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1, and will activate

on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.

Priority of Displays for Multi-Partition

This table shows the priority of displays if more than one of these conditions exists at the same time.

Priority Description Display Priority Description Display

1 Fire Alarm F 8 Not Ready N

2 All Other Alarms ✴

9 Ready R

3 AC Loss P 10 Armed STAY S

4 Comm Fail C 11 Armed AWAY A

5 System Low Battery L 12 Armed INSTANT I

6 Trouble T 13 Armed MAXIMUM M

7 Bypass B

3-1

SECTION 3

Installing the Control

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

This section describes the procedures for mounting and wiring the control panel and all the peripheral devices.

Mounting the Control Cabinet

To mount the control cabinet, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN

INSTALLED.

2 Using fasteners or anchors (not supplied), mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall in a clean, dry area

that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

UL To provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and

Figure 3-2. Cabine

Attack Resistance Considerations

to follow.

Installing the Cabinet Lock

To install the lock, see Figure 3-1 and perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Remove cabinet door, then remove the lock

knockout from the door. Insert the key into the

lock.

2 Position the lock in the hole, making certain

that the latch will make contact with the latch

bracket when the door is closed.

3 When correctly positioned, insert supplied lock

clip on the inside of the cabinet into the slots

on the lock cylinder. Use ADEMCO Lock #

N6277V1 and Lock Clip # P3422-2 (supplied).

CABINET DOOR

BOTTOM

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

cab_lock_snap-001-V0

ADEMCO

PUSH

SNAP

TAB

SNAP

TAB

PUSH

ON LOCK

UNTIL IT

IS SEATED

SECURELY

STEP 2STEP 1

CHECK

POSITION

Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock

Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines

• The panel door must be supervised. Mount the

clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet's

right side wall and wire it to zone 6.

• Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it

for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only

one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-

hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one

burglary partition is used. Enable field 3*17 so

that the system responds to a ground fault in

accordance with its zone type rather than a ground

fault response.

ULC 24-Hour audible alarm (zone types 6 and 7) is

not approved for ULC applications.

• All wiring between the transformer and panel must

be run in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to

be run in conduit.

• All unused knockouts must be plugged using the

disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied), as

indicated in Figure 3-2.

• Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox

using the 15 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws

(supplied) after all wiring, programming, and

checkout procedures have been completed.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-2

RUN BELL WIRES

IN CONDUIT

PLATE CABINET

MOUNTING

SCREWS

(3)

fire_burg_cab-001-V0

BOARD

RUN ALL REMAINING

WIRE THROUGH HERE

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THESE

KNOCKOUTS

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING,

REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF

DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN.

KNOCKOUT

OPENING

HEX NUT AND

WASHER

DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE

KNOCKOUT OPENING)

CARRIAGE BOLT

CABINET SIDE WALL

(OUTSIDE)

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines

• Follow the guidelines given above for Mercantile

Premises listing.

• For safe and vault installations, a shock

sensor (not supplied) that is Listed for

protection of sheet metal enclosures, as well

as an additional Listed tamper switch, must

be installed on the cabinet backbox to protect

the cabinet from being removed from the wall.

These devices must also be connected to zone

Commercial Fire Guidelines

For Commercial Fire installations, the following

requirements apply (See Figure 3-3).

• System components mounted inside the cabinet

must be placed so that all power-limited wiring is

separated from all non-power-limited wiring by ¼-

inch (6.4mm).

• Non-power-limited wiring that exits the control

panel (i.e., transformer wiring) must be run in

conduit.

• All unused knockouts must be plugged.

• All wiring that exits the control panel must be

strain-relieved (e.g., tie-wrapped).

WIRES MUST BE

RUN IN CONDUIT

BOARD

BATTERY BATTERY

ZONE

WIRING

TELCO

LINE

fire_burg_cab-003-V0

FROM

TRANSFORMER

PLATE

TIE WRAPS TIE WRAPS

TIE WRAPS

NOTE: ALL POWER-LIMITED

WIRING MUST BE SEPARATED

FROM NON-POWER LIMITED

AND HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING

BY 1/4-INCH (6.4 mm)

Figure 3-3: Commercial Fire Installation

Considerations

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-3

Installing the Control's Circuit Board

To install the circuit board in the cabinet, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the Mounting Plate is installed

securely in the cabinet (Figure 3-4, Detail A).

Install the nylon standoffs (supplied) into the

top corner holes of the mounting plate (Detail

B.) Insert the top of the circuit board onto the

two standoffs at the top of the mounting plate.

2 Place the board flat and secure to the

mounting plate with the three accompanying

screws and spacers as shown in (Detail C.)

NOTES:

• Make sure that the tabs on the side of the plate did

not pop out during shipping and are inserted into

the appropriate slots.

• Make sure that the mounting screws are tight. This

ensures that there is a good ground connection

between the PC board and the cabinet.

• Dress field wiring away from the microprocessor

(center) section of the PC board. Use the mounting

plate brackets on the left and right sidewalls of the

cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps

(Figure 3-3). These steps are important to minimize

the risk of panel RF interference with television

reception.

fire_burg_cab-002-V1

PC BOARD

PLATE CABINET

SPACER

PLATE

CABINET

DETAIL A

SIDE VIEW

ATTACHMENT

DETAIL C

SIDE VIEW,

PC BOARD INSTALLATION

USING SPACERS (3) AND

MOUNTING SCREWS (3)

MOUNTING

SCREW

PLATE

CABINET

DETAIL B

INSTALLING

NYLON STANDOFFS (2)

Figure 3-4: Mounting the PC Board

Installing the Keypads

• Up to 31 addressable keypads (addresses 00-30)

may be used (you may need to use an auxiliary

power supply if the 1A aux. output is exceeded).

• Use a 2-line alpha display, 6160CR-2 (for fire only)

or 6160 (for burglary only).

To wire the keypads, perform the following steps:

Step Action

Determine wire gauge by referring to the

Wire Run Length/Gauge table below.

Wire Run Length/Gauge Table

Wire Gauge Length

#22 gauge 450 feet

#20 gauge 700 feet

#18 gauge 1100 feet

#16 gauge 1750 feet

2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect

individual keypads to separate wire runs.

The maximum wire run length from the

control to a keypad, which is homerun back

to the control, must not exceed the lengths

listed in the table.

Step Action

3 Run field wiring from the control to the

keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable

of the wire gauge determined in step 1).

4 Connect keypad(s) to terminals 11, 12, 13,

and 14 on the control board, see Figure 3-5.

NOTE: In a Fire Application and when using

only one keypad, it must be connected to

Keypad Port 2, and must be mounted within

20 feet of the cabinet in conduit. The keypad

on Port 2 is electrically isolated from those

on Port 1 and will continue to function even

if wiring problems prevent the other

keypads from working properly.

• The length of all wire runs combined,

regardless of the wire gauge, must not

exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad

conductor cable is used (1000 feet if

unshielded cable is run in conduit, which

acts a shield, or if shielded cable is used).

• If more than one keypad is wired to one run,

then the above maximum lengths must be

divided b

the number of ke

pads on the run

(e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two

keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-4

RED

KEYPADS

BLACK

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

kypd_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-5: Keypad Connections to Control Panel

Commercial Fire Requirements

For commercial fire installations, the primary fire

keypad must be installed on panel Keypad Port 2 and

mounted within 3 feet of the control panel. External

wiring must be run in conduit.

Additionally, you can install supplemental fire keypads

and devices on ECP Port 1, using an ECP Isolator to

separate all fire wiring from all burglary wiring (see

Figure 3-6).

PANEL KEYPAD PORT

ECP ISOLATOR

12 13 1411

2341

ECPISO-001-V0

TB1

TB2

FIRE

DEVICES

BURGLARY

DEVICES

V2 Out (Red)

GND (Black-)

V1 Out (Red)

GND (Black -)

GND

G (Green)

Y (Yellow)

12V (Red +)

GND (Black -)

G (Green)

Y (Yellow)

12V (Red +)

GND (Black)

+12V In (Red)

V2 Out (500ma)

V1 Out (500ma)

Y (Yellow)

G (Green)

Y (Yellow)

G (Green)

Figure 3-6. ECP Isolator Wiring

Addressing the Keypads

The keypads will not operate until they are

physically addressed and enabled in the

system's

Device Programming

in the

#93 Menu

Mode

Set each keypad for an individual address (00-30)

according to the keypad's instructions. Set an alpha

keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher

addresses (00 and 01 are enabled in the system's

default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and

above will appear blank until they are enabled in the

system's program. Each keypad must be set for a

different address.

• Do not set any keypads to address 31

(nonaddressable mode). They will interfere

with other keypads (as well as other devices)

connected to the keypad terminals.

• If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is

present on a keypad, data from the control is

not reaching the keypad. Please check your

wiring.

Figure 3-7: Intentionally Left Blank

Installing External Sounders

The VISTA-128FBPN provides two Notification Appliance Circuits for operating fire and burglary alarm notification

appliances. Each circuit is rated as Special Application for Fire and 10VDC – 14VDC, 1.7A max. power-limited for

Burglary.

NOTE: The total alarm current drawn from Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, polling loop, Bell 1, and Bell 2 cannot

exceed 2.3A for battery-independent operation.

The outputs have the following options:

• Selectable to activate by individual zone assignments

• Selectable for confirmation of arming ding.

• Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter zones are faulted.

• Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30 minutes.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-5

You may use a Commercial Fire Listed 24VDC Power Supply to convert one or both Vista-128FBPN 12VDC,

1.7A style-Y supervised Special Application Notification Appliance Circuits to 24V, style-Y supervised, Special

Application Notification Appliance Circuits.

UL • Burglary Notification Appliance Circuits must be programmed for a timeout of 16 minutes or longer.

• Commercial fire alarm systems require Notification Appliance Circuits to be supervised.

Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision

The VISTA-128FBPN monitors the Notification Appliance Circuits wiring for open and short circuit faults while the

output is inactive. The system provides a trouble indication (Zone 970 Bell 1; 971 Bell 2) when an open occurs. When a

short occurs between the Bell (+) and Bell (-) terminal wiring, or between the Bell (+) terminal wiring and earth ground

the system provides a trouble indication (972 Earth Ground).

The VISTA-128FBPN indicates the trouble condition regardless of whether the system is armed or disarmed. The zone

displays on the keypads, reports to the event log, and transmits to the central station (if programmed) on Partition 1.

The trouble is cleared from the display by entering the user code + OFF.

• Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL installations.

• In Commercial Fire installations, the 4204CF cannot be used to drive sounders in the same audible area as

sounders connected to the alarm outputs of the control panel.

Synchronization Requirements for Commercial Fire

Notification Appliance Circuit outputs must be wired to a Sync Module if more than one device is used. Follow

instructions provided with Sync Module. Be sure to use the compatible Sync Module for the Alarm Indicating Device

selected.

MANUFACTURER SYNC MODULE MODEL NUMBER

GENTEX AVSM

SYSTEM SENSOR MDL

WHEELOCK DSM

• All visual notification appliances within the same physical area must be synchronized.

• The bell outputs are listed as Special Application Notification Appliance Circuits.

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices

ALARM INDICATING DEVICE TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL #

RX7 UL Indoor Sounder, 12V ADT 875936B

Horn Strobe 2w GENTEX GEC3-12, GES3-12, GEH-12

Horn Strobe 4w GENTEX GEC3-12, GES3-12, GEH-12

Chime, 12/24V, Selectable Tone & Volume, Red SYSTEM SENSOR CHR

Chime, 12/24V, Selectable Tone & Volume, White SYSTEM SENSOR CHW

Chime/Strobe, 12/24V, Selectable Candela, Tone & Volume, Red SYSTEM SENSOR CHSR

Chime/Strobe, 12/24V, Selectable Candela, Tone & Volume, White SYSTEM SENSOR CHSW

Horn, 12/24V, Red SYSTEM SENSOR HR

Horn, 12/24V, White SYSTEM SENSOR HW

Horn, 12/24V, Outdoor, Red SYSTEM SENSOR HRK

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR P2R

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR P2RH

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR P2RK

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR P2RHK

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR P2W

2-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR P2WH

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR P4R

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR P4RH

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-6

ALARM INDICATING DEVICE TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL #

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR P4RK

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR P4RHK

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR P4W

4-Wire Wall Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR P4WH

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR PC2R

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RH

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RK

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RHK

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR PC2W

2-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR PC2WH

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR PC4R

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR PC4RH

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR PC4RK

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR PC4RHK

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR PC4W

4-Wire Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR PC4WH

2-Wire Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR SR

2-Wire Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR SRH

Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR SRK

Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR SRHK

Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR SW

Wall Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR SWH

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR SCR

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red SYSTEM SENSOR SCRH

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR SCRK

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, Red, Outdoor SYSTEM SENSOR SCRHK

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, Standard Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR SCW

Ceiling Mount Strobe, 12/24V, High Candela, White SYSTEM SENSOR SCWH

Horn Strobe 12V, 4W WHEELOCK MT-121575W

Horn Strobe 12V, 2W WHEELOCK AS-121575W

Strobe 12V WHEELOCK RSS-121575W

Horn Strobe 12V, 2W WHEELOCK NS-121575W

Horn 12V/24V WHEELOCK NH-12/24

Horn 12V WHEELOCK AH-12

Horn 12V/24V WHEELOCK MT-12/24, MT4-12/24

Bell 12V WHEELOCK MB-G6-12, MB-G10-12

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-7

Table 3-1: BELL 1 AND BELL 2 MAXIMUM DEVICE RATING

NOTE: To use this table, the device Candela Setting and Horn Setting MUST match what is listed in

the Table.

Mfg

Alarm Indicating

Device Type Model

Candela

Setting Horn Setting

Max # of

Devices

Gentex Horn Strobe 12V, 2w GEC3-12,GES3-12,GEH-12 15 Mech-Temporal 6

Gentex Horn Strobe 12V, 2w GEC3-12,GES3-12,GEH-12 75 Mech-Temporal 2

Gentex Horn Strobe 12V, 4w GEC3-12,GES3-12,GEH-12 15 Continuous Mech 6

Gentex Horn Strobe 12V, 4w GEC3-12,GES3-12,GEH-12 75 Continuous Mech 2

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V HR - - 38

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V HW - - 38

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V HRK - - 38

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2R 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2RH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2RK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2RHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2W 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P2WH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4R 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4RH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4RK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4RHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4W 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V P4WH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2R 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2RH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2RK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2RHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2W 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC2WH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4R 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4RH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4RK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4RHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4W 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Horn, Strobe12/24V PC4WH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SR 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SRH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SRK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SRHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SW 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SWH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCR 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCRH 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCRK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCRHK 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCW 15 Temporal - High 10

System Sensor Strobe12/24V SCWH 15 Temporal - High 10

Wheelock Horn Strobe 12V, 4W MT-121575W 15 Continuous/Hi 4

Wheelock Horn Strobe 12V, 2W AS-121575W 15 Continuous/Hi 6

Wheelock Strobe 12V RSS-121575W 15 na 6

Wheelock Horn Strobe 12V, 2W NS-121575W 15 Hi 7

Wheelock Horn 12V/24V NH-12/24 na Hi 80

Wheelock Horn 12V AH-12 na Hi 9

Wheelock Horn 12V/24V MT-12/24,MT4-12/24 na Continuous Horn 10

Wheelock Bell 12V MB-G6-12,MB-G10-12 na na 9

Supervising the Notification Appliance Circuits

To wire the NAC using the supervision feature, perform the following:

Install a 2K EOL resistor (Model 2EOL, supplied) across the last notification appliance on each Notification Appliance

Circuit to be supervised.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-8

Auxiliary Relay Connections

The VISTA-128FBPN provides a built-in Form C relay with contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC, 2.8A. The relay may be

programmed (field 3✳61) for one of the following functions:

• Alarm Activation

• Trouble/Supervisory Activation

• 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

• Battery Saver

Alarm Activation

(3✳61 = 1 or 4) Steady activation in response to an alarm.

If field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay remains active until Aux. Relay Timeout expires or until User Code + OFF is

entered. This option can be used to provide an unsupervised Notification Appliance Circuit for supplementary strobes,

sounders, etc. when wired to the Aux Power 1 or a separate power supply, see Figure 3-8.

If field 3✳61 = 4, the auxiliary relay remains activated until User Code + # + 67 is entered. By default, the relay is set

to activate on alarm zones 1-8 with no timeout (field 3✳61 = 1).

When field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay can be programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation of arming ding

(field 3✳57) or Chime Mode (field 3✳59).

NOTES:

USE NON-POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.

WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED.

DO NOT EXCEED RATINGS OF THE SUPPLY USED.

IF AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT IS USED, THE COMBINED

ALARM CURRENT DRAIN FROM AUX. PWR. 2,

BELL 1, AND BELL 2 CANNOT EXCEED 2.3A MAX.

belloutput-005-V0

812117

AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS

ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 1-8 ALARMS

(STEADY ALARM OUTPUT).

NO TIMEOUT.

109

AUX PWR #1

GROUND

POLE

N.O.

N.C.

CAN DRAW POWER FROM

AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT OR

FROM SEPARATE SUPPLY.

ALARM

Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation

Trouble/Supervisory Activation

(3✳61 = 0) Steady activation in response to any zone or system related trouble condition or to any fire supervisory

condition. The auxiliary relay remains activated until all fault conditions have been corrected and a User Code + OFF

is entered.

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

(3✳61 = 2) Momentary (8-second) activation in response to a second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence following a

fire alarm condition. This interrupts power to 4-wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones 1-8 and polling loop

zones, allowing the detectors to be reset. Power to the detectors should be wired to the auxiliary relay and to Aux. Power

1 output, see Figure 3-9.

Battery Saver

(3✳61 = 3) When this option is selected, the auxiliary relay is normally activated (e.g., N.O. and pole contacts are

connected) and de-activates 4 hours after the start of AC Loss. Using this feature, non-critical loads, such as

supplementary keypads, can be disconnected from the auxiliary power outputs, allowing a smaller capacity battery to be

used. The relay re-activates within a few seconds after the AC power restores.

•

EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

EOLR-1

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

HEAT

DETECTOR

–

BLK

ZONE

TERMINALS

(15-27)

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

CONTROL

PANEL

•

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

AUXILIARY RELAY

Keypad Prt 1

4_wiresmk-005-V0

Figure 3-9: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-9

Telephone Line Connections

The VISTA-128FBPN provides one main built-in dialer for communication to the central station and one optional

5140DLM Backup Dialer, both supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines.

Do not connect the system to telephone lines that require ground start service.

For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72) applications, use communications device 7845i-ent alone, the

main dialer with the 7845i-ent or use the main dialer with the 5140DLM.

For listed fire remote station (UL864/NFPA 72) applications, use the main dialer with the 5140DLM.

Telephone line supervision is required for commercial fire alarm systems.

Main Dialer Connections

To connect the main dialer, refer to the Summary of Connections diagram and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the main dialer to the telephone company lines using the RJ31X cable supplied.

2 If the dialer output is connected to telephone lines that have a telephone company MTU installed, cut the

blue jumper (W6).

Installing the 5140DLM Backup Dialer

Do not connect the main dialer and the backup dialer to the same telephone company line.

To install the 5140DLM, refer to the Summary of Connections diagram and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the 5140DLM to the main PC board shield.

2 Connect the backup dialer to the telephone company lines using the RJ31X cable supplied.

3 Connect the backup dialer to the J3 connector on the main PC board using the ribbon cable (supplied with

the module).

4 Connect the earth ground screw on the 5140DLM to the earth ground terminal (30) on the main PC board

using 16AWG wire.

5 If the dialer output is connected to telephone lines that have a telephone company MTU installed, cut the

blue jumper on the 5140DLM PC board.

Telephone Line Supervision

If the tip/ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts (13 volts if the blue jumper is cut) or the handset current is less

than approximately 10mA, the supervision circuits for the dialer output will indicate a fault condition. Faults on the

phone lines are displayed as zones 974 (main dialer) and 975 (backup dialer).

• To prevent risk of shock, disconnect the phone lines at the telco jack before servicing the panel.

• If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the PABX has backup power

supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours (central station usage) or 60 hours (remote station usage).

Many PABXs are not power-backed up, and connection to such a PABX results in a communication failure if

power is lost.

Zone 974 (Primary Dialer Supervision) must be enabled in order for the backup dialer (or communications

device, if used) to communicate in the event that the primary dialer fails.

If a communications device is used as the primary dialer, then its supervisory zone must be enabled (e.g. 8XX,

where XX is the device address of the communications device.

UL The telephone line inputs have overvoltage protection in accordance with UL1459.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-10

Reporting Formats

The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID format. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting all 128

zones, as well as openings and closings for all 150 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with the

MX8000 receiver. If you need to update your MX8000 receiver, contact your distributor.

The system supports ADEMCO Low Speed 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; Sescoa/Radionics 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; ADEMCO 4+2 Express;

ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Contact ID Formats.

Dialer Operation

When only the main dialer is enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,0), the system attempts to route all messages over the main dialer

output. When both the main and backup dialers are enabled (field 3*30 = 1,1), the panel will Alternate

Dialers by pairs (make two attempts to report on the Main Dialer, then make two attempts to report on the

Back Up dialer). The panel will continue to do this to the Primary Phone number until it reaches its

programmed attempts in 3*21, then it will do the same to the Secondary phone number. Test Report is

always sent on Alternating dialers.

The communicator makes up to 8 attempts to transmit the messages to one or both telephone numbers (primary and

secondary), depending on the report routing options programmed. After the 8th attempt, the communicator hangs up and

the system displays “COMM FAIL” on the keypad. The number of dialer attempts are programmed in field 3✳21 (default

= 8; must be restricted to 3, 4, or 5 if a secondary phone number is programmed).

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1, 2 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other zones (excluding the

2K EOL resistor).

To wire burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8, connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (15 through

27). Connect N.C. and N.O. devices as follows:

• Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series

with the devices, following the last device.

• Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires

at the last device.

Using 2-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1 and 2

Zone 1 and 2 can support up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each (32 total).

The alarm current on zones 1 and 2 supports only one smoke detector in the alarmed state.

When assigned zone type 9 or 16, the second entry of a User Code + off at a keypad interrupts power to these zones to

allow detectors to be reset following an alarm.

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

DETECTOR TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL #

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector DSC FSA-210B

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector DSC FSA-210BT

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector System Sensor 2W-B

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector System Sensor 2WT-B

2-Wire Ionization Smoke Detector System Sensor 1451 w/B401B

base

2-Wire Photoelectric Low-Profile Smoke Detector System Sensor 2151 w/B401

base *

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector ESL 521B

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector ESL 521BXT

2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector ESL 429AT

* This model may not be used on zones designated as Zone Type 16: Fire with Verification.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-11

• These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the VISTA-128FBPN and are the only 2-wire smoke

detectors that may be used.

• A combination of heat detectors and smoke detectors is not permitted on a zone programmed for fire

verification.

• Fire installations require the use of a synchronization module to synchronize the sounders and strobes on

the system.

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2

2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones and must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the

last detector.

To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1 and/or zone 2, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select 2-wire smoke detectors from the list of compatible detectors.

2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1 (terminals 15 and 16), and/or zone 2 (terminals 17 and 18) as

shown in Figure 3-10. Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.

3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across the zone 1 terminals. The EOL resistor

must be connected across the loop wires at the last detector.

ZONE 1

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR

SMOKE

2000 OHMS

EOLR

2_wiresmk-001-V0

Figure 3-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for zone 2 use terminals 17 and 18)

Using 4-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1-8

You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's Auxiliary Power output without

exceeding the output's rating (1A).

Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be

momentarily interrupted using the auxiliary relay.

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated for 12VDC operation and that has alarm reset time not exceeding

6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke detectors are listed below.

DETECTOR TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL #

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector DSC FSA-410B

4-Wier Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector DSC FSA-410BT

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Sounder & Heat Detector DSC FSA-410BST

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Aux. Relay & Heat Detector DSC FSA-410BRT

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke w/Aux. Relay, Sounder & Heat Detector DSC FSA-410BRST

End of Line Power Supervision Relay for FSA-410 Series Smoke Detectors DSC RM-2

Polarity reversal module for FSA-410 series Smoke Detectors DSC PRM-4WC

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector System Sensor 4W-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector System Sensor 4WT-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Sounder & Heat Detector System Sensor 4WTA-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Aux. Relay & Heat Detector System Sensor 4WTR-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Aux. Relay, Sounder & Heat Detector System Sensor 4WTAR-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Aux. Relay, Sounder & Isolated Heat Detector System Sensor 4WITAR-B

4-Wire Photoelectric Air Duct Smoke Detector, Extended Air Speed Range System Sensor DH100ACDCLP

4-Wire Ionization Air Duct Smoke Detector System Sensor DH100ACDCI

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-12

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

UL • Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device (use a System Sensor EOLR-1 EOL

relay module connected as shown in

Figure 3-11

• A combination of heat detectors and smoke detectors is not permitted on a zone programmed for fire verification.

• Fire installations require the use of a synchronization module to synchronize the sounders and strobes on the

system.

To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8 or polling loop expansion module zones, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select 4-wire smoke detectors (see list of compatible detectors shown previously in this section).

2 Connect detectors (including heat detectors, if used) across terminals of the zone selected. All detectors must

be wired in parallel. See Figure 3-11.

3 Connect the EOLR at the last detector in the loop across the zone’s terminals. You must connect the

EOLR across the loop wires at the last detector.

•

EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

EOLR-1

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

HEAT

DETECTOR

BLK

CONTROL PANEL

ZONE TERMINALS

OR POLLING LOOP

EXPANDER ZONE

TERMINALS

(e.g. 4208SNF)

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

CONTROL

PANEL

•

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

AUXILIARY RELAY

Aux. Pwr ( )

4_wiresmk-005-V0

Figure 3-11: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration

Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the Vista-128FBPN Cabinet Door Tamper Switch.

Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one burglary

partition is used. Program it for 24-hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one burglary partition is used.

Enable the Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function (program field 3✳17).

Using 2-Wire Latching Glassbreaks on Zone 8

Zone 8 can support 2-wire glassbreak detectors. The zone provides enough standby current to power up to 50 2-wire

glassbreak detectors meeting the requirements listed below.

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors

Use detectors that meet the following ratings:

Standby Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC

Standby Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent resistance of all detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current: 2mA–10mA

Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds

NOTES:

• You can use detectors that exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of less than 3.8 volts in

alarm.

• The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these ratings.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-13

GLASSBREAK

DETECTOR ZONE 8

(+)

(-)

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

2000

OHMS

EOLR

glass_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-12. Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8

• The alarm current provided by zone 8 supports only one glassbreak detector in the alarmed state.

• Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8. Other contacts may

prevent proper glassbreak detector operation.

To wire 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors to zone 8, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select compatible 2-wire glassbreak detectors that meet the requirements stated previously.

2 Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals 27 and 28). See Figure 3-12.

3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across the zone’s terminals. You must connect the

EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.

Tamper Supervision for the Hardwired Zones

The system can be programmed to monitor for either an open condition or a short condition of a tamper switch on zones

1-8. End-of-line supervision is required for this option.

Wiring a Tamper Switch to Zones 1-8

The wiring of the tamper switch depends on whether the tamper switch and the sensor are normally open or normally

closed.

• If you are using a normally closed sensor, the tamper switch must be normally open. Refer to Figure 3-13 for

the wiring configuration.

• If you are using a normally open sensor, the tamper switch must be normally closed. Refer to Figure 3-14 for

the wiring configuration.

To wire a tamper switch on a hardwired zone, connect the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across the zone’s

terminals. You must connect the EOL resistor at the last detector for proper operation of the tamper

supervision.

NOTE: For the normally closed sensor, program the zone for trouble on short. For the normally open sensor,

program the zone for trouble on open.

NOTE: For zones with a response type of 9 or 16 (Fire), the tamper selection must be “0” none.

2k EOLR

TAMPER

SWITCH

SENSOR

Figure 3-13: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-14

2k EOLR

TAMPER

SWITCH

SENSOR

Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision

Installing V-Plex Devices

The polling loop provides both power and data to the Vplex devices, and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones

enabled on the loop. The maximum current draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more than 128mA (unless

the system uses a 4297 Polling Loop Extender Module).

Devices that can be programmed via either DIP switches or the built-in unique serial number must be set for serial

number mode operation.

All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the [+] and [-] polling loop terminals of the control panel (28

and 29). You can wire from device to device, or have multiple branches connected directly to the control panel in a star

configuration. If a module is using optional aux power, do not connect the [ - ] polling loop terminal to the device. Use

the ground from the power source.

1. Do not run polling loop wires within 6” of AC power, telephone, or intercom wiring. The polling loop is carrying

data between the control panel and the devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this

communication. The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this

spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported

is cut in half when shielded wire is used.)

2. The Quest 2260SN can be programmed as a “Smart Contact” in

Zone Programming

. This prevents those PIRs

from displaying faults during the disarmed state. You cannot mix Quest 2260SN “Smart Contacts” with non-

“Smart Contacts” in the system.

3. Twisted-pair is recommended for all wire runs.

4. No more than 64mA may be drawn on any individual wire run.

5. When a star configuration is used, the total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft (2000 ft. if

you are using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire).

UL • The 4190SN right loop must not be used, and the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.

• The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA-128FBPN Auxiliary Power Output.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-15

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

Model Number Type

4297 Extender Module

4208SN 8 Zone V-Plex Interface

4208SNF 8 Zone V-Plex Class A Interface

269SN V-Plex Holdup Switch

5192SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices

5192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector

5193SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector Device

5193SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector

4101SN Serial Number Single-Output Relay Module

4208U Universal 8-Zone Expander

4959SN Aluminum Overhead Door Contact

4193SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

4293SN Serialized 1-Zone Expander

4190SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

4190WH DIP Switch 2-Zone Expander

998MX Serialized PIR

Quest 2260SN Serialized PIR

IS2500SN V-Plex PIR

V-Plex VSI V-plex Short Isolator

NOTE: If using the new 5193SD/SDT V-Plex smoke detectors (or older 5192SD/SDT with the maintenance DIP sw enabled)

the "Smart" option must be selected in zone programming or when they enroll unpredictable results may occur if the

smoke goes into a High Sens or Low Sens condition.

To install polling loop devices, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select devices from the list of compatible devices shown previously.

2 Set the DIP switches in the device (if required). Refer to the device’s instructions for the DIP Switch Tables.

3 Mount each device in the desired location. Refer to the device’s instructions.

Run wires from the control panel to each device on the polling loop (see Figure 3-15). No individual wire run

may exceed the lengths shown in the following table.

Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

Wire Gauge Max. Length

#22 gauge 650 feet

#20 gauge 950 feet

#18 gauge 1500 feet

#16 gauge 2400 feet

5 Wire each device to the polling loop, making sure of the correct polarity (refer to the device’s instructions).

NOTE: If you are using serial number devices, and intend to enroll each device through the keypad

automatically, wire no more than 25 of these devices to the control at a time. Then power up and

program them before connecting the next 25. Leave previously enrolled devices connected.

If you intend to manually enter the serial numbers through the keypad or through Compass downloading

software, all the devices may be connected before powering up to program.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-16

25 26

polling_loop-012-V2

VPLEX-VSI

BURG DEVICES

FIRE DEVICES

NOTE: FIRE DEVICES MAY

BE WIRED DIRECTLY TO

THE PANEL WITHOUT

USING AN ISOLATION

DEVICE.

Figure 3-15: Polling Loop Connections to the Control Panel

Polling Loop Supervision

A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only.

If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot "see" that device), the system displays a trouble condition for all

zones on that device. If the panel is armed when a device fails, and the zone is a burglary zone, the zone will go into

alarm.

A trouble on zone 997 prevents a partition from being armed, unless all polling loop zones on that partition are

bypassed.

Using the 4297 Polling Loop Extender

The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide additional polling loop current, to extend the polling loop wire

run length, and/or to provide individual electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to Figures 3-16 and 3-17, to follow.

DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender module with the VISTA-128FBPN

Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary load on the panel’s

power supply.

CONTROL PANEL

INPUT POLLING LOOP

CLASS B, STYLE 3

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

4297

PANEL

AUX

POWER

OTHER

DEVICES

INPUT LOOP LIMITS:

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP LIMITS = SAME AS INPUT LOOP

•128 mA MAX. LIMIT CURRENT TO 64mA ON ANY

INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN.

• NO MORE THAN 64 DEVICES MAY BE USED.

NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN CAN EXCEED:

•

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS

COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 4000FT.

(2000FT. IF USING SHIELDED WIRE)

GAUGE LENGTH

#22 650 FT

#20 950 FT

#18 1500 FT

#16 2400 FT

• NO MORE THAN119 DEVICES COMBINED.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH

LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT.

(3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED ). WIRE IN

CONDUIT, OR IF USING SHIELDED WIRE

polling_loop_003-V4

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

V-PLEX

DEVICE

V-PLEX

DEVICE

DO NOT CONNECT

Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-17

INPUT POLLING LOOP

CONTROL PANEL

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #1

4297

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

• NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1. NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED

ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #2.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT.

IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE). TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EX-

TENSION LOOP #2 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE).

• WHEN USING THE 4297 TO EXTEND THE POLLING LOOPS, FIRE DEVICES MUST BE ON SEPARATE LOOPS FROM BURG DEVICES TO

PROVIDE ISOLATION.

4297

• DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN

SERIES (i.e., DO NOT CONNECT ONE

MODULE'S EXTENSION LOOP TO

ANOTHER MODULE'S INPUT LOOP.)

polling_loop-013-V1

BURG

DEVICES

FIRE

DEVICES

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2

CLASS B, STYLE 3

V-PLEX

DEVICE

V-PLEX

DEVICE

2 1

TO PANEL AUX POWER

DO NOT CONNECT

Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules

NOTE: The input loop limits stated in Figure 3-16 apply to Figure 3-17 as well.

Wireless Zone Expansion

UL The 5881ENHC RF Receiver is Listed for Commercial Fire and Commercial Burglary applications. The 5883H is

Listed for Commercial Fire applications only. All other RF receivers are not UL listed for Commercial applications.

The following table lists the receivers that may be used and the number of zones they support.

5800 Series Receivers

Receiver Zones

5881ENHC up to 128 (use in commercial fire or

burglary applications)

5883H up to 128 (use in commercial fire

applications)

RF System Operation and Supervision

The 5800 RF system operation has the following characteristics:

• The receiver responds to a frequency of 345MHz.

• The receiver has a nominal range of 200 feet.

• Supervised transmitters send a supervisory signal every 70-90 minutes.

• Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF reception of receivers 2 and 1, respectively. The reception is

supervised for the following two conditions:

1. The receiver goes “deaf” (doesn’t hear from any transmitter) within a programmed interval of time (defined by

program field 1*30).

2. Proper RF reception is impeded (i.e., jamming or other RF interference). The control checks for this condition

every 20 seconds.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-18

UL A response type 19 (24-Hour Trouble) must be programmed for zones 990 (1st receiver) and 988 (2nd receiver) for

UL installations.

• The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary installations.

• You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports a tamper

condition.

• The control checks the receiver connections about every 20 seconds. The receiver supervisory zone is 8 + 2-digit

receiver device address (for example, Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805).

NOTE: This zone must be programmed with a response type (e.g., type 19 24-Hour Trouble) before it supervises the

connection to the receiver.

• Use two identical receivers to provide either a greater area of coverage or redundant protection. They must be set for

different addresses.

• Any zone from 1 to 128 can be used as a 5800 Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64 (reserved for a

wireless keypad).

RF System Installation Advisories

• Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area. Do not place it on or near metal objects. This will decrease the

range and/or block transmissions.

• Install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the control panel or any keypads, to avoid interference from the

microprocessors in these units.

• If dual receivers are used:

a. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other, as well as from the control panel and remote keypads.

b. Each receiver must be set to a different device address. The receiver set to the lower address is considered the

1st RF receiver for supervisory purposes.

c. The House IDs must be the same.

d. Using two receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the system can support (127 zones

using the 5881ENHC or 5883H).

Installation and Setup of the 5881/5883 RF Receivers

Take note of the address you select for the RF receiver, as this address must be enabled in the system’s

Device

Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode

To install the 5881ENHC/5883 RF receiver, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the receiver, following the advisories stated previously.

NOTE: Must be mounted in a 5800Box Enclosure.

2 Set the DIP switches in the receiver for the address (01-07). See Figure 3-19.

Make sure the address setting is not being used by another device (keypad, relay module, etc.).

3 If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-head screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab as shown in Figure 3-

18. When the receiver is pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break off and remain on the wall. This will

activate a tamper switch in the receiver and cause generation of a tamper signal. Note that this signal will

also be generated when the receiver’s front cover is removed.

4 Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug the connector at the

other end of the harness into the receiver.

5 Refer to the Installation Instructions provided with the receiver for installations regarding antenna

mounting, etc.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-19

5881ENHC-001-V0

SCREW

Figure 3-18: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection

TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD

CONNECTION POINTS. EACH RECEIVER

MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN.

USE MAX. of 220 ft. [67m of #22 (0.64mm)

WIRE or 550 ft. (168m) of #18 (1mm) WIRE

FOR EACH RUN. OBSERVE 20 ft. MAX.

FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.

(SEE RECEIVER'S INSTRUCTIONS.)

DIP SWITCH WHITE AREAS = SWITCH

HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE

RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT

CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR

ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW

SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."

SWITCH

POSITION

RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS

(" - " MEANS OFF)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)

ON ON ON

ONON

ONON ONON

ONON

FOR FUTURE USE

DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)

ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL

FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S

INSTRUCTIONS)*.

OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE

INSTALLATIONS.

* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS

THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED

IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S

INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS).

MOUNTING

HOLES

INSERT IN

RIGHT-HAND

TERMINALS

CIRCUIT

BOARD

DIP SWITCH

YELLOW

RED

BLACK

GREEN

INTERFERENCE

INDICATOR LED

WIRING

OPENING

PLUG & SOCKET

ANTENNAS

5881-001-V0

Figure 3-19: 5881ENHC/5883 RF Receiver (cover removed)

5800 Series Transmitter Setup

• Transmitters have built-in serial numbers that must be enrolled in the system using the #93 Menu Mode

Programming, or via the downloader.

• Some transmitters can support more than one “zone” (loops or inputs) (e.g., 5817CB). Each loop must be assigned a

different zone number.

Transmitter Supervision

Supervised RF transmitters send a check-in signal to the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is

not received from each supervised transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31), the “missing” transmitter

number(s) and “CHECK” or “TRBL” are displayed.

Some transmitters have built-in tamper protection, and annunciate a “CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers are

removed.

If a loss of supervision occurs on a transmitter programmed for Fire, it reports in Contact ID as a Fire Trouble

(373), not Loss of Supervision (381), to the central station.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-20

Transmitter Input Types

All transmitters have one or more unique factory-assigned input (loop) codes. Transmitters can be programmed as one

of the following types:

Type Description

RM (RF Motion) Sends periodic check-in signals, fault and low-battery signals. The control panel automatically restores the

zone to “ready” after a few seconds. It is intended for facilities with multiple motion detectors that may fault

and restore simultaneously. The transmitter must remain within the receiver’s range.

NOTE: RF Motion may only be used on loop 1 of a door/window type transmitter.

RF (Supervised RF) Sends periodic check-in signals, fault, restore, and low-battery signals. The transmitter must remain within

the receiver’s range.

UR (Unsupervised RF) Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but the control does not supervise the check-in signals. The

transmitter may be carried off-premises.

BR (Unsupervised

Button RF) These send only fault signals. They do not send low-battery signals until they are activated. The

transmitter may be carried off-premises. Not applicable in Commercial installations.

Transmitter Battery Life

Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific

wireless device being used. Factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature

may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation.

The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to

arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that point within the system.

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters

Model Product Input Type

5800CO Carbon Monoxide Detector with Built-in Wireless Transmitter RF

5817CB Commercial Wireless Transmitter RF

5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter RF

5806W3 Photoelectric Smoke Detector with Built-in Wireless Transmitter RF

5808W3 Photoelectric Smoke/Heat Detector with Built-in Wireless Transmitter RF

5809 Rate-Of-Rise Heat Detector RF

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-21

Installing Output Devices

The VISTA-128FBPN supports up to 96 outputs. Each device must be programmed as to how to act (ACTION), when to

activate (START), and when to deactivate (STOP). The 4204, 4204CF, and/or 4101SN may be used as output devices.

NOTE: The first 32 of the 96 Output Devices may be supervised (zones 601-632). Only the relays on 4204CF

module may be supervised. If supervision is programmed for other types of Output Devices, unpredictable

results may occur.

Installing the 4204 (Burg only) and 4204CF Relay Modules

Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C (normally open and normally closed) contacts. Each 4204CF module

adds one style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuit to the system. For 4204CF modules, only relays 1 or 3 on

each module can be programmed.

The relay module will not operate until the device address you have set the DIP switches for is enabled in the

control’s

Device Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode

• Relays should not re-energize until the panel is fully reset.

• For Commercial Fire installations, only one notification appliance module may be used, and only one

notification appliance output (A or B) may be used on that module.

• If the 4204CF relay is enabled for a NAC, it must follow the action of the NAC on the panel.

• Relays (aux and 4204's) cannot be used for off-premises signaling

• In Commercial Fire installations, the 4204CF cannot be used to drive sounders in the same physical area as

sounders connected to the alarm outputs of the control panel.

• Output devices are not intended for overriding automatic building and fire functions.

To install the relay modules, see Figures 3-20 and 3-21 and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a device address 01-15.

Do not use an address being used by another device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF modules per the instructions provided with them.

Connect the module’s wire harness to the control (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug the connector on the harness to

the module.

When mounting remotely, homerun each module to the control. The table below shows the maximum wire

run lengths. Refer to the instructions provided with the 4204CF for its maximum permissible wire lengths.

Wire Gauge Maximum Length

#22 125 feet

#20 200 feet

#18 300 feet

#16 500 feet

4204 ADDRESS SETTINGSSWITCH

NUMBER ("—" means "OFF")

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415

ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —

ON ON ——ON ON ——ON ON ——ON ON ——

ON ON ON ON ————ON ON ON ON ————

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON —————— ——

12345

➞

OFF ON

TB1

4204

TB2

4-PIN

CONSOLE

PLUG

RELAY

TYPICAL

(SHOWN "OFF")

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

DATA IN FROM

CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OU T

TO CONTROL

(+) 12V

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED

SWITCH SHOWN

FOR ADDRESS "0"

DIP SWITCH FOR

SETTING DEVICE

ADDRESS AND

ENABLING/DISABLING

TAMPER

COVER

TAMPER

(REED)

SWITCH

13 14 15 16

4204-01-V1

NOT USED

Figure 3-20: 4204 Relay Module

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-22

4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS

SWITCH

NUMBER

("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —ON —

3ON ON ——ON ON ——ON ON ——ON ON ——

4ON ON ON ON ————ON ON ON ON ————

5ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ————————

12 3 4 5

OFF ON

DIP SWITCH:

WHITE AREAS DENOTE SWITCH HANDLES

POSITION 1

ENABLES/DISABLES COVER TAMPER

ON = TAMPER DISABLED; OFF = TAMPER ENABLED

SHOWN DISABLED (AS SHIPPED).

POSITIONS 2-5

DETERMINE 4204CF'S ADDRESS:

CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS SPECIFY ADDRESS TO

USE. "0" ADDRESS SETTING SHOWN (AS SHIPPED).

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE

ADDRESS AND

ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

4-PIN CONSOLE

PLUG

12VDC; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING APPLIANCE OUTPUT

RELAY COILS). CURRENT DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25mA + (80mA PER ACTIVE OUTPUT).

DATA IN FROM CONTROL

DATA OUT TO CONTROL

GROUND

POLARIZED

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCES

CONNECT TO A POWER-LIMITED 12V REGULATED

UL1481 LISTED POWER SUPPLY.

ALARM POLARITY SHOWN

EACH OUTPUT PROVIDES

STYLE Y SUPERVISION

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

OUTPUT B

2K EOLR

EOL20

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

OUTPUT A

2K EOLR

EOL20

EACH OUTPUT RATED 1.2A MAX

4204CF

4204CF-004-V1

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND CONSOLE DATA

OUTPUTS ARE POWER-LIMITED.

ALL POWER-LIMITED WIRING MUST BE SEPARATED

FROM NON-POWER-LIMITED AND HIGH-VOLTAGE

WIRING BY 1/4" (6.4mm).

ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER-LIMITED

WHEN POWERED BY THE CONTROL PANEL.

NFPA-72 COMPLIANT.

RED

GRN

BLK

YEL

TB2

FOR UL COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS, ONLY ONE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE

MODULE MAY BE USED, AND ONLY ONE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE OUTPUT (A or B)

MAY BE USED ON THAT MODULE.

TB1

13 16 1

1514

Figure 3-21: 4204CF Relay Module

Installing 4101SN Relay Modules

The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a serial number polling loop output device. The 4101SN features the

following:

The position of the relay is supervised, but not the actual external contact wiring.

• Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC with contact supervision.

• One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary input zone.

• Operating power and communication with control panels via the V-Plex polling loop.

• Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with tamper-protected cover.

NOTE: If Fire devices are used on the polling loop no more than 10 (ten) 4101SNs may be used.

• If are using ZONE # for the START of a polling loop output, and want the output to stop when the same zone

restores, the STOP programming must be blank.

• No more than 20 polling loop outputs may be programmed for the same START or STOP condition in

Output

Programming

Connect the device to the polling loop, terminals 28 (+) and 29 (-). Be sure to observe polarity.

Installing a Remote Keyswitch

A UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the Honeywell 4146, can be used for remote arming/disarming of the burglary

part of the system and for silencing alarms. The keyswitch operates in only one particular partition.

The keyswitch is wired across zone 7. This zone is no longer available as a protection zone. Make sure *15 is assigned to

part (1-9). This sets zone 7 to response type 05.

Operation

• A momentary short arms the partition in the AWAY mode, and a short held for more than 10 seconds arms the

partition in STAY mode 1. A subsequent short disarms the partition.

• The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition’s status (see table that follows).

• A momentary short silences Notification Appliance Circuits and keypad sounds, and disarms the system if it was

armed. A subsequent short clears the alarm memory indication and resets 2-wire smoke and glassbreak detectors (if

used).

• The keyswitch can be used to silence fire alarms without disarming the burglary portion (program a “9” in field

✳15). A momentary short silences alarm outputs only if a fire alarm is present.

UL In Commercial Fire installations, mount the keyswitch next to the primary keypad on keypad port 2 (J4 header) and

wire in conduit within the same room as the control panel. The keypad displays the UL-required “ALARM

SILENCED” when the keyswitch is used to silence a fire alarm.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-23

LED Indications

Green Red Indication

On Off Disarmed & Ready

Off Off Disarmed & Not Ready

Off On Steady Armed Away

Off Slow Flash Armed Stay

Off Rapid Flash Alarm Memory

The keyswitch reports as user 0, if Open/Close reporting is enabled in field ✳40.

Keyswitch Tamper Operation

For UL Commercial Burglary installations, the tamper switch must be wired to zone 6, see Figure 3-23).

Program zone 6 for Day Trouble/Night Alarm (response type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from the wall, the

tamper switch opens, causing an alarm or trouble on the zone. This also causes the control to disable keyswitch

operation until the tamper is restored and the associated partition is disarmed.

Wiring for the Remote Keyswitch

To install the ADEMCO 4146 keyswitch, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the ADEMCO 4146 to the panel as shown in Figure 3-22.

2 If you are using the tamper, make sure it is connected to a zone.

4146 KEYSWITCH

(READY)

GREEN

(ARMED)

RED

TO ZONE 8 + (TERM 27)

TO OUT 5 (J2 PIN 6)

TO ZONE 7 + (TERM 25)

TO ZONE 7/ZONE 8 - (TERM 26)

TO GND (J2 PIN 8)

TO OUT 1 (J2 PIN 7)

4146_keyswitch-001-V0

2000

OHMS

EOLR

2000

OHMS

820

OHMS

820

OHMS

TAMPER

SWITCH

(N.C.)

LOCK

SWITCH (N.O.)

Figure 3-22: Remote Keyswitch Wiring

Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder (For Commercial Burglary use only)

An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad’s built-in

sounder. The remote sounder will duplicate all sounds (such as alarms, trouble beeps, etc.) except for the short beeps

associated with keypad key depression. One application of this feature would be to produce chime beeps at a distant

location from the keypads.

If used, program field 3✳20 must be set to “0” and field ✳15 must be set to the desired partition number.

The remote sounder must be connected to the Output 5 on the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-23.

123456 78 9

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(VIOLET)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

J2 CONNECTOR

AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER

(10MA)

4142TR CABLE

J2_trigcon-006-V0

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 5

OUT 2

INPUT 1

OUT 6

OUT 3

OUT 7

OUT 4

BLACK

RED

Figure 3-23: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-24

Communicators Connected to the ECP

The control can support an IP or GSM communications device (7845i-ent, 7845i-GSM, or 7845-GSM) that connects to

control panel’s keypad terminals. All messages programmed for transmission via the phone lines may also be sent via

the communications device. These messages are transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the format programmed

for the control in fields 45 and 47.

We recommend that, if possible, you use Contact ID for the main dialer. If Contact ID is not used, certain types of

reports are not sent.

Supervision

The data lines between the control and the communications device, as well as certain functions in the Communicator,

can be supervised. If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs, both the communications device and the

control’s dialer can be programmed to send a Trouble message to the central station.

NOTE: For complete information, see the Installation Instructions that accompany the Communicator.

Operation

The VISTA-128FBPN features Dynamic Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority message reporting when

a Communicator is used. These message outputs are accessed through data fields ✱56 and ✱57, respectively. The

Dynamic Signaling feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant reports sent to the central station.

The feature is described as follows:

Dynamic Signaling Delay (Field ✱56)

Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first reporting destination before it attempts to send

a message to the second destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225 seconds, in 15-second increments.

Dynamic Signaling Priority (Field ✱57)

Select the initial reporting destination for messages, Primary Dialer (0) or Communicator (1).

The chart below provides an explanation of how the Dynamic Signaling feature functions.

If Priority

(✱57) is…

And message is… Then…

Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no message is sent to

communications device.

Primary Phone

No. ("0")

Not acknowledged before delay

expires

Message is sent to both the Primary Phone No. and

communications device.

Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no message is sent to

Primary Phone No.

Communicator

("1")

Not acknowledged before delay

expires

Message is sent to both the Primary Phone No. and

communications device.

Additional communications device reporting options are defined by selecting the events for each subscriber ID in fields

58 and 59. The reporting events are Alarms, Troubles, Bypasses, Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test. Also,

within an enabled category, the specific event must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance, zone 10 is enabled to

report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10 will report via the communications device, but zone 11 will not.

Messages are transmitted from the VISTA-128FBPN to the communications device on a “first in/first out” basis. If

events occur at the same time, they are transmitted in order of priority. The priority from most to least important is :

Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms, Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles, Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test

messages, and all other types of reports.

There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the communications device: primary and secondary. These correspond to

the two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for each partition. If a subscriber ID for a partition is not

programmed (disabling reports to that central station), the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID in the

communications device will not be transmitted.

When the Communicator is being used, *51 dual reporting should not be used.

If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-128FBPN, then the communications device will send the appropriate reports

to the primary and secondary central stations.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-25

Installing the Communicator

To install the communications device, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the communicator according to the instructions that accompany the Communicator.

2 Connect the data in/out terminals and voltage input terminals of the communicator to the control’s keypad

connection points, terminals 11, 12, 13 and 14. See Figure 3-24.

RED

COMMUNICATOR

BLACK

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

LRR-001-V0

Figure 3-24: Wiring Communicator to Keypad Terminals

Trouble Messages

The following messages are displayed on the 6160/6160CR-2 when a problem exists on the communications device:

1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the Communicator is low.

2. “PLL out of Lock”: The Communicator has an internal fault and cannot transmit any messages.

3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without a valid transmission.

4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never attained.

5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained throughout the transmission.

6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has been detected.

7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The communicator’s EEPROM is corrupt (the internal CRC is bad).

NOTES:

Items 2 and 3 require factory service.

Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low battery.

If the item 6 message appears, check the antenna, connection and cable; if they are secure, factory service is required.

All these messages are displayed in conjunction with the “CHECK 8xx” message, which indicates a trouble on the

address to which the communications device is programmed in the control.

All of these events except Antenna Fault are sent to the event log and reported to the central station using Contact ID

Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble). Antenna Fault uses Event Code 357. If the tamper is tripped, it uses Event

Code 341 (expansion device tamper).

Event Log Connections

This system has the ability to record up to 512 events

of various categories in the Event Log (history log) of

various categories in the Event Log (history log). Each

event is recorded with the time and date of its

occurrence (if real-time clock is set).

The categories are Alarm, Supervisory/Check, Bypass,

Open/Close, System and Test conditions. The log may

be viewed on an alpha keypad or printed on a serial

printer.

• When using a printer, field 3*19 must be

programmed for RS232 input (1).

• If you are using a serial printer, J2 pins 5

and 9 on the control panel cannot be used

to interface with Automation software

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-26

Connecting the Transformer

Use the 1451 Transformer with enclosure (supplied) with the VISTA-128FBPN control. This transformer provides

18VAC/72VA secondary winding for powering the control.

To connect the 1451 transformer to the control, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Remove the front cover of the enclosure.

2 Mount the enclosure to the wall near the VISTA-128FBPN control panel. The enclosure has four mounting

holes on its back surface for this purpose.

3 Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in conduit. A dedicated circuit must be used.

4 Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to the transformer’s white and black primary leads.

5 Connect the earth ground post on the back of the enclosure to a good earth ground.

6 Run 16AWG wire in conduit from the enclosure to the control panel.

7 Use wire nuts to splice the transformer blue 18VAC secondary leads to the 16AWG wire. Connect the 16AWG

wire at the control panel to terminals 1 and 2.

8 Replace the front cover of the enclosure and fasten it with the screws supplied.

• Use wires having insulation rated for at least 90°C operation and suitable for non-power limited applications.

• Use care to keep 18VAC wiring separated from all other wiring inside the control panel’s enclosure. This must

be done by running non-power-limited 18VAC wiring into the control panel’s enclosure via one of the knockouts

on the left-hand side, and then tie-wrapping these wires to the tie-wrap loops located near the knockout.

Earth Ground Connections

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be effective, the designated earth ground

terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground connection

is #16 AWG, run no farther than 30 feet.

The panel requires the earth ground connection for its lightning transient protection devices and in order to detect

Ground Fault conditions.

To connect the earth ground, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use grounding methods

specified in the National Electric Code).

2 Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire to the ground post. The ground wire should be the only wire

under this nut.

3 Run a 16AWG wire from the ground post to the panel’s earth ground terminal (30). Use a second green nut

(supplied) to secure this wire to the ground post.

This connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to different earth

ground systems.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-27

Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load

1. In Worksheet 1, enter devices used on the polling

loop. Calculate total current draw on the polling

loop.

Worksheet 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw

Polling Loop Device Current # of Units Total

Polling Loop Subtotal

(terminals 28 & 29 – 128mA) ✳

✳The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds

128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used. This

module is powered from the panel’s auxiliary power, and

provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an

additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of points

connected to the panel cannot exceed 119.

2. In Worksheet 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary

Power 1. Calculate standby and alarm currents,

then add to get Auxiliary Power 1 current subtotal.

Worksheet 2: Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model #

Device Current X

# of Units

Standby Alarm

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

(terminals 10 & 11) 1A max. 1.7A max.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-28

3. In Worksheet 3, enter devices used on

Auxiliary Power 2. Calculate standby and

alarm currents, then add to get Auxiliary

Power 2 current subtotal.

Worksheet 3: Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model #

Device Current X

# of Units

Standby Alarm

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal

(pin 5 on keypad port 2) 400mA max. 1.7A max.

4. In Worksheet 4, enter devices connected to the

Bell 1 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then

add to get the Bell 1 Output current subtotal.

Worksheet 4: Bell 1 Output Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model #

Device Current X

# of Units

Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 1 Output Subtotal

(terminals 3 & 4 – 1.7A max.)

5. In Worksheet 5, enter devices connected to the

Bell 2 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then

add to get the Bell 2 Output current subtotal.

Worksheet 5: Bell 2 Output Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model #

Device Current X

# of Units

Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

(terminals 5 & 6 – 1.7A max.)

6. In Worksheet 6, enter the total calculated subtotals

of all listed outputs from Worksheets 1 through 5, then

add to get the combined current.

Worksheet 6: Total VISTA-128FBPN Current Load

Total Current

Standby Alarm

Polling Loop Subtotal

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal

Bell 1 Output Subtotal

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

VISTA-128FBPN PCB Current (Incl.

2-wire smoke detector loading on

zones 1 & 2)

300mA 470mA

5140DLM Backup Dialer Module 5mA

(inactive)

15mA

(active)

Total Current Load

(1A max. standby; 2.3A max. alarm)

NOTE: The 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active.

However, since the control panel PCB current includes the

main dialer current, and since the main dialer is inactive when

the 5140DLM is active, the 5140DLM imposes only a 15mA

added load on the current supply.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-29

The total control panel standby load must be

limited to 919mA for 24-hour standb

time usin

two 12V, 17.2AH batteries connected the Power

supply. If you are using a Commercial Fire

Listed 24VDC Power Supply use the worksheet

supplied with the power suppl

to determine the

correct battery size.

Determining the Size of the Standby

Battery

For burglary installations requiring 4-hour standby

time followed by 15-minutes alarm time, use a 12AH

battery to support all loads up to and including the

maximum system load (e.g., 1.3A standby/2.8A alarm

total control panel load). For fire installations requiring

24-hour standby time, use the worksheet below to

calculate the required battery capacity.

DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid

type). These batteries require a different

charging voltage than is supplied by the panel.

Use Worksheet 7 to determine the required backup

battery capacity and use The Battery Selection Table to

determine the battery model number. A dual battery

harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be

wired in parallel for increased capacity.

Using the total calculated from Worksheet 6, calculate

the battery capacity required for the installation.

Worksheet 7: Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet

Capacity Formula Calculated

Value

Standby

Capacity

Total standby current X 24 hours

X 1.1 contingency factor.

Alarm

Capacity

Total alarm curr. X 0.083 (5 min)

or X 0.250 (15 min)

Total

Capacity

Add standby and alarm

capacities

Use the Battery Selection Table to select the

appropriate battery for the installation.

Battery Selection Table

Capacity Recommended Battery Comment

4AH Yuasa NP4-12

7AH Yuasa NP7-12

12AH Yuasa NP12-12 Fits in large

mercantile

cabinet only.

14AH Yuasa NP7-12 Connect two

in parallel.

17.2AH Yuasa NPG18-12 Fits in large

mercantile

cabinet only.

Connect the battery, referring to Figure 3-25.

The standby battery is automatically tested for

10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours

after exiting Programming mode. In addition,

entry into the Test mode initiates a batter

test.

The VISTA-128FBPN also runs a 5-second

battery test every 60 seconds to check if the

battery is connected.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

3-30

BLACK

RED

BLACK

RED

12V

BATTERY

12V

BATTERY

(IF REQUIRED)

BATTERY TABS

MAIN PCB

DUAL

BATTERY

HARNESS

(2 PAIRS

SUPPLIED)

OBSERVE POPARITY!

+ RED

BLK

USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY

TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF

BATTERY HARNESSES (NOT

SUPPLIED) TO CONNECT ONE

OR TWO ADDITIONAL BATTERIES

IN PARALLEL.

NOTE: WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL:

- USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND

WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING.

- USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND

STATE OF CHARGE.

- USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY!

- IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED

AT SAME TIME, EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME

WEAK.

- AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED,

THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT

DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES.

batt_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-25: Connecting the Backup Batteries

4-1

SECTION 4

Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Program Modes

There are two programming modes for the VISTA-

128FBPN. These are the Data Field Program Mode and

the #93 Menu Mode. The Data Field Program Mode is

where many system options are programmed. The #93

Menu Mode is an interactive mode that require a 2-line

alpha keypad (6160/6160CR-2).

The factory-loaded defaults (✳97) enable

keypad addresses 00-01 only. A keypad set to

one of these addresses must be used to

program the system initially.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode

Enter Programming mode entering the Installer Code

+ [8] + [0] + [0] + [0] keys once the power has been

applied to the control. The factory installer code can be

changed once in the Program mode (field ✳00).

NOTE: The default for the Installer Code is 5140.

Exit the Programming mode by either method a or b:

a. Press [✳] + [9] + [8]. Exiting by this method

prevents the installer code from being used to re-

enter Programming mode. The only way to re-

access programming mode is by depressing both the

[✱] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds

of power-up.

b. Press [✳] + [9] + [9]. Exiting by this method

permits the installer code to be being used to re-

enter Programming mode.

Data Field Programming Mode

In the Data Field Program Mode you may access any

field simply by entering either [✳] or [#] + the field

number:

• To write or change information in a field press [✳]

+ the field number (✳03).

• To read the information in a field press [#] + the

field number (#03).

When the entries for a field are completed, the keypad

beeps three times and advances to the next field.

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING

COMMANDS

✳91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

✳92 Display the software revision level of the control panel

✳93 Enter Menu mode programming

✳94 Go to next page of fields

✳99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming

Mode with no installer code lockout

✳98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another

The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to

as “pages”). The first page is accessed as soon as

Programming Mode is entered.

The second and third pages of data fields are indicated

at the keypad by a 1 and 2, respectively, in front of the

2-digit field address. “ALT PROGRAM MODE” is

displayed along with a “100”, “200” or “300,” indicating

which page of program fields is accessed.

To access the next level of programming fields:

1 Press ✳94.

2 Press [✳] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of

the program field, and make the desired entry.

NOTES:

Press ✳94 to move to 2nd page, (fields 1✳01 - 1✳76);

press ✳99 to move back to 1st page.

Press ✳94 to move to 3rd page (fields 2✳00 - 2✳88);

press ✳99 to move back to 2nd page.

Press ✳94 to move to 4th page, (fields 3✳00 - 3✳85);

press ✳99 to move back to 3rd page.

Entry Errors

• If an address is improperly entered, the keypad

displays “Not Used” or “FC.”

• If a program entry is improperly entered (for

example, a larger number than is permitted), the

keypad display will go blank.

In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✳] + the

correct field number and then enter the correct data.

Programming System-Wide Data Fields

Values for some programming fields are system-wide

(global), and some can be different for each partition

(partition-specific).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

4-2

The partition-specific programming fields are

automatically skipped when programming the

global fields. If the system has only 1 partition,

the partition-specific fields

are not

automaticall

skipped.

To program system-wide data fields, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 0.

The following display appears:

Program Mode

✳Fill # View – 00

2 If the control has not been programmed before,

enter ✳97 to load factory defaults.

3 Press [✳] and enter the first field number to be

programmed (for example, ✳00, Installers

Code). Make the desired entry. When the field

is complete, the keypad beeps three times and

advances to the next field. If you do not want to

change the next field, press [✳] and enter the

next field number to be programmed.

First Page of fields

(✳00 - ✳90)

To move to the next page of fields, press ✳94.

To return to the previous page, press ✳99.

4 Press ✳99 or ✳98 to exit Program Mode.

NOTE: If the number of digits that you enter in a data

field is fewer than the maximum permitted (for

example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last

entry and waits. To proceed, enter [✳] + the next data

field you wish to program.

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields

To program partition-specific data fields once in

Program Mode, do the following:

Step Action

1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0

2 Press ✳91, which will prompt you for the

partition number desired.

3 Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g.,

✳09) to begin programming.

When the first field’s entry is completed, the

next partition-specific field is automatically

displayed. When all partition-specific fields

are programmed, the system returns to the

global programming fields (page 1 fields).

4 Repeat this procedure for each partition in

the installation.

NOTE: To return to the global program fields before

finishing all fields, enter any global field number.

Programming Partition-Specific Fields

Press ✳91 to select a partition.

↓

↓↓

↓

Enter the partition to be programmed.

↓

↓↓

↓

Enter a partition-specific field number and make entry.

↓

↓↓

↓

After partition-specific fields are programmed,

press ✳91 to select next partition.

Enter any global field number to return to the global

fields at any time.

#93 Menu Mode Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode through

which much of the system’s programming is done. In

this mode, there are “question and answer” prompts

that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has

been entered. These prompts require a 2-line alpha

keypad (6160/6160CR-2).

After programming all system-related programming

fields in the usual way, press #93 while still in

programming mode to display the first choice of the

menu-driven programming functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1

(YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.

Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence.

Section 4 – Programming

4-3

Below are the main menu selections. For details refer to the VISTA-128FBPN Programming Guide.

MAIN MENU OPTIONS

ZONE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For programming the following:

• Zone Number

• Zone Response Type

• Partition Number for Zone

• Dialer report code for zone

• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)

• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters and serial polling loop devices into the system.

• Zone Attributes (e.g., Arm w/Fault, Silent, etc.).

EXPERT MODE?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Same as Zone Programming except:

• Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.

• Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.

NOTE: All the zone attributes cannot be programmed using the Expert Mode.

REPORT CODE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For programming the following:

• Alarm report codes for zones

• Restore and supervisory codes

• All other system report codes

ALPHA PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

• Zone Descriptors

• Default Screen

• Custom Words

• Partition Descriptors

DEVICE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the following device characteristics for addressable devices, including keypads, RF receivers

(5881ENHC), output relay modules (4204/4204CF), and communication devices (7845i-ent, 7845i-GSM, and

7845-GSM):

• Device Address

• Device Type

• Keypad Options (including Partition assignment)

• RF House ID

• Communications device Options (including Programming Communicator)

OUTPUT PGM?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining output device functions.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Must be set to “0”.

CUSTOM INDEX ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Must be set to “0”.

ACCESS POINT PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Must be set to “0”.

ACCESS GRP PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Must be set to “0”.

EVENT/ACTION PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Must be set to “0”.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

4-4

MAIN MENU OPTIONS

SCHEDULED CHK-IN

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the schedule for the system to automatically call the downloader.

Following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode:

#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands

#93 Enters Menu Mode.

[✳] Serves as [ENTER] key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0 Press to answer NO.

1 Press to answer YES.

00, or 000+[✳] Quits Menu Mode and goes back to Data Field Programming Mode, if entered at first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Number Designations

The VISTA-128FBPN supports up to 128 zones of

hardwire, polling loop and/or wireless protection,

distributed among up to 8 partitions. The following

table lists the zone numbers and the types of sensors

that can be used with each, and some alternate

functions of the zones.

Zone Function

1 & 2 2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)

6 Cabinet Tamper/Ground Fault (if used)

7 Keyswitch (if used)

8 Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)

1-8 Traditional Hardwired Zones

1-128 5800 Series Wireless Devices

9-128 Polling Loop Devices

995 ✳ + 1 Panic (Do not use in Fire Alarm applications)

996 # + 3 Panic (Do not use in Fire Alarm applications)

999 ✳ + # Panic (Do not use in Fire Alarm applications)

Zone Defaults

Zone # Zone Type Zone # Zone Type

001 09 800-830 00

002 09 970 19

003 03 971-974 19

004 03 975 00

005 03 988 & 990 00

006 03 992* N/A

007 03 995 00

008 03 996 00

009–128 00 997 19

601-632 00 999 06

NOTES:

* Zone 992 is the Duress zone. Programming of the zone

response type is not applicable. This zone requires only the

report code programming.

Zone Index

The zones are designated as follows:

ZONE #

RANGE

ZONE

FUNCTION ACTUAL ZONE

001 – 128 Protection

zones

As indicated

601 – 632 Relay

Supervision

Zones

6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,

Relay Number 03, if supervised,

is zone 603.

NOTE: Relay supervision

should be used only for

relays on 4204CF modules.

800 – 830 ECP Device

Supervision

Zones

8 + 2-digit Device Address; e.g.,

Device Address 01, if

supervised, is zone 801.

970-977,

988, 990, &

997

System

Supervision

Zones

970: Bell 1Output

971 Bell 2 Output

972 Earth Ground

973 J2 Input 1

(communications

device)

974 Dialer 1

975 Dialer 2

976 Auxiliary Relay

977 J2 Trigger Outputs

988: 2nd Wireless Receiver –

not receiving signals

990: 1st Wireless Receiver –

not receiving signals

997: Polling Loop (short

circuit)

992, 995 –

999

Duress and

Keypad Panics

992: Duress

995: 1 + ✳ panic (A key)

996: 3 + # panic (C key)

999: ✳ + # panic (B key)

Supervision zones should be given a response type of either 05

(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night) or 19 (24-Hour Trouble).

Section 4 – Programming

4-5

Communication Defaults

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Prim) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0] [0]

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SEL. [0] Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING [0] no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY

[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY

[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

Communication Defaults for Zones

ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd

1 01 00 54 05 00 107 09 00

2 02 00 55 06 00 108 10 00

3 03 00 56 07 00 109 11 00

4 04 00 57 08 00 110 12 00

5 05 00 58 09 00 111 13 00

6 06 00 59 10 00 112 14 00

7 07 00 60 11 00 113 15 00

8 08 00 61 12 00 114 01 00

9 09 00 62 13 00 115 02 00

10 10 00 63 14 00 116 03 00

11 11 00 64 15 00 117 04 00

12 12 00 65 01 00 118 05 00

13 13 00 66 02 00 119 06 00

14 14 00 67 03 00 120 07 00

15 15 00 68 04 00 121 08 00

16 01 00 69 05 00 122 09 00

17 02 00 70 06 00 123 10 00

18 03 00 71 07 00 124 11 00

19 04 00 72 08 00 125 12 00

20 05 00 73 09 00 126 13 00

21 06 00 74 10 00 127 14 00

22 07 00 75 11 00 128 15 00

23 08 00 76 12 00

24 09 00 77 13 00

25 10 00 78 14 00

26 11 00 79 15 00

27 12 00 80 01 00

28 13 00 81 02 00

29 14 00 82 03 00

30 15 00 83 04 00

31 01 00 84 05 00 601-632 00 00

32 02 00 85 06 00 800-830 00 00

33 03 00 86 07 00 970 00 00

34 04 00 87 08 00 988 00 00

35 05 00 88 09 00 990 00 00

36 06 00 89 10 00 992 (DURESS) 11 00

37 07 00 90 11 00 995 00 00

38 08 00 91 12 00 996 00 00

39 09 00 92 13 00 997 06 00

40 10 00 93 14 00 999 06 00

41 11 00 94 15 00 ALARM RST. 00 00

42 12 00 95 01 00 TROUBLE 00 00

43 13 00 96 02 00 TRBLE. RST 00 00

44 14 00 97 03 00 BYPASS 00 00

45 15 00 98 04 00 BYP. RST. 00 00

46 01 00 99 05 00

47 02 00 100 06 00

48 03 00 101 07 00

49 04 00 102 08 00

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

4-6

Zone Response Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines

the way in which the system responds to faults in that

zone. There are three keypad-activated zones (panic

keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop

supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two

for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined

below.

Type 00: Zone Not Used

Program with this zone type if the zone is not used.

Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary

Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and

the system is armed in the AWAY or STAY mode. When

the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM

mode, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay begins

whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming

mode selected. These delays are programmable.

Assign this zone type to zones that are used for primary

entry to and exit from the facility.

Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary

Provides a secondary entry delay, if the system is

armed in the AWAY or STAY modes and the zone is

faulted. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or

MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided.

Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is

armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These

delays are programmable.

Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry

and exit of the facility and require more time than the

primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone

type must be greater than those for zone type 01 (e.g., a

garage, loading dock, or basement door).

Type 03: Perimeter Burglary

Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the

system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or

MAXIMUM mode.

Assign this zone type to all exterior doors and windows.

Type 04: Interior, Follower

Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry

delay time) if an entry/exit zone is faulted first.

Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active

when the system is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM

mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry

delay.

If the Interior Follower zone is programmed for one of

the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is

automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the

STAY or INSTANT mode.

Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as

a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass

upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).

Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night

Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the

system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or

MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the

system annunciates a latched trouble sounding from

the keypad (and a central station report, if desired).

Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foil-

protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a

zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room or

drug supply room. It can also be used on a zone in an

area where immediate notification of an entry is

desired.

Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm

Sends a report to the central station but provides no

keypad display or sounding. Assign this zone type to a

zone containing an Emergency button.

Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm

Sends a report to the central station and provides an

alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external

alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an

Emergency button.

Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm (Not for Medical

Use)

Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm

sound at the keypad only. (No other Notification

Appliance Circuit is activated.) Assign this zone

type to a zone an Emergency button or one containing

monitoring devices such as water sensors or

temperature sensors.

Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)

Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble

condition on open circuit. A fire alarm produces a

pulsing of the Notification Appliance Circuit if a Sync

Module is used. This type is always active and can only

be bypassed by the Installer code or the Master code,

(field 3*85).

Type 10: Interior with Delay

Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed

entry and exit delay times) when armed in the AWAY

mode. Provides only exit delay when armed in the

MAXIMUM mode (no entry delay).

If the Interior with Delay zone is programmed for one of

the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is

automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the

STAY or INSTANT mode. Delay begins whenever

sensors in this zone are violated, regardless of whether

or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.

Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as

a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass

upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).

Type 12: PLM Supervision – Not Used

Type 13: Remote P/S

Sends a report to the central station upon detection of

an AC power loss on a power supply following the

parameters selected in *19 (Randomize AC Loss

Report). The exception is that if option 3 is selected for

*19, 6- 12 hour reporting will not be used. Instead if

option 3 is selected, reporting will be 1-3 hours, the

same as if option 2 were selected.

Section 4 – Programming

4-7

Type 14: CO Detector Alarm

Sends a report to the central station and displays a CO

text message at the keyboard. Upon a CO alarm only

the keypad’s sounder will annunciate. The external bell

will not sound at all.

Type 16: Fire with Verification

Provides a fire alarm when there is a short circuit, and

a trouble condition when there is an open circuit. An

initial short results in a 7-second smoke detector power

reset. Any subsequent short within 90 seconds causes a

fire alarm. This type is always active and can only be

bypassed by the Installer code or the Master code, (field

3*85).

Type 17: Fire Waterflow

Provides a trouble condition on open circuit and an

alarm on a short circuit that remains longer than the

programmed time delay (fields 3✳16 and 3✳18). The

alarm can be silenced by either an entry of User Code

+ OFF or when the zone restores (field 3✳14). This type

is always active and can only be bypassed by the

Installer code or the Master code, (field 3✳85).

Type 18: Fire Supervisory

Provides a supervisory response on a short circuit. Open

circuit can be programmed for either a trouble or

supervisory response (field 3✳13). This type is always

active and can only be bypassed by the Installer code or

the Master code, (field 3✳85).

Type 19: 24-Hour Trouble

Provides a trouble response on a short or open circuit.

No alarm sounders are activated.

Type 20: Arm-STAY (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 21: Arm-AWAY (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 22: Disarm (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to disarm when the zone is

activated.

Type 23: No Alarm Response

Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired,

but with no accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door

access).

Type 27: Access Point – Not Used

Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision – Not

Used

Type 29: Momentary Exit – Not Used

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the same

zone response type for all 8 partitions, but panics may be

individually enabled for each partition.

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990, and 997) report as

trouble conditions only, and as such, should be assigned zone

type 19 if annunciation is desired. See

Polling Loop Supervision

and

RF System Operation and Supervision

SECTION 3:

Installing the Control

for more information.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

4-8

Zone Input Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned an input type, which

defines the where the system will “look” for status of

the zone (RF receiver, polling loop, etc.). Zone input

types are defined below.

Type 01 Hardwired (HW)

Reserved for built-in hardwired zones 1 through 8.

Type 02 RF Motion (RM)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters. Sends periodic

check-in signals, fault and low-battery signals. The

control panel automatically restores the zone to “ready”

after a few seconds. This type is designed for facilities

with multiple motion detectors that may fault and

restore simultaneously. The transmitter must remain

within the receiver’s range.

NOTE: If using RF Motion with a door/window type

transmitter, only loop 1 may be used.

Type 03 Supervised RF (RF)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will be

supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter must

remain within the receiver’s range.

Type 04 Unsupervised RF (UR)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will not be

supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter may

therefore be carried off-premises.

Type 05 Unsupervised Button RF (BR)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters specifically designed

for this input type. These transmitters send only fault

signals. They do not send low-battery signals until they

are activated. The transmitter may be carried off-

premises.

Type 06 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL)

Use for V-Plex devices with a built-in serial number.

Type 07 DIP Switch Loop (DP)

Select for polling loop devices that use DIP switches for

programming the zone number of the device.

Type 08 Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS)

Select for the second loop of two-zone polling loop

devices (e.g., 4190WH).

Type 09 Console Input (CS)

Select when this zone is to be controlled by a keypad

input (user code + [#] + [7] + [3]) for access control.

Type 10 Pass Point Access Control (ACS) – Not Used

Type 11 VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM) – Not

Used

Type 12 VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE) – Not Used

Type 13 VistaKey General Purpose (GP) – Not Used

Section 4 – Programming

4-9

Using a Relay to Unlock a Door

This control can be programmed so that a user can

trigger a relay for 2 seconds (e.g., to unlock a door) by

entering the User Code + [ 0 ].

To program a relay for this purpose, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program the output type as 1 or 2.

3 For type 1, program the ECP address and

relay number.

4 For type 2, program the house and unit codes.

5 Program the relay number in field 1∗76

(partition-specific).

NOTE: Cannot be used on partition 1 in

Commercial Fire installations.

See Output Programming in the Programming Guide

for a detailed explanation.

Programming for Communicator

• Program the communications device in Device

Programming in the #93 Menu Mode

Programming.

• Program field ✳56: Selects the time the panel

should wait before it attempts to send a message to

the second destination.

• Program field ✳57: Selects the initial reporting

destination for messages.

• Program field ✳58: Selects events for the primary

sub’s ID.

• Program field ✳59: Selects events for the secondary

sub’s ID.

• Program field 1✳70 Event Log Types (1=enable;

0=disable for each type).

• Program field 1✳71 12/24-Hour Time Stamp

Format (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr).

• Program field 1✳72 Event Log Printer On-line

(0=disable; 1=enable).

• Program field 1✳73 Printer Baud Rate (1=300;

0=1200).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

4-10

5-1

SECTION 5

Data Field Descriptions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

About Data Field Programming

The following pages list this control’s data fields in numerical order. Field numbers are listed in the left column, followed

by a “Title and Data Entries column, which lists the valid entries for each field. Experienced installers can simply follow

this column when programming the data fields. The “Explanation” column provides explanatory information and special

notes where applicable.

NOTE: Refer to the Programming Guide for the default values. They are not listed in this section.

Use the

Programming Guide

to record the data for this installation.

Programming Data Fields

Data field programming involves making the appropriate entries for each of the data fields. Start Data Field

programming by entering the installer code + 8 + 0 + 0 + 0.

All Fire zones should be assigned to partition 1.

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*00 Installer Code

Enter 4 digits, 0-9

The Installer Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use.

This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the

keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it isn’t used to arm

the system. This code cannot be used to re-enter Program Mode if Program

Mode is exited by the *98 command.

*04 Enable Random Timers For

Partitions 1-8

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the activation time of the window is randomized up to 30 minutes

and is initialized by either of two methods:

User Code + [#] + [41] Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the

partition.

User Code + [#] + [42] Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the

partition with a time window within 6 PM and 5 AM.

Must be 0 for Commercial Burglary installations.

*05 System Events Notify

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled the system sends notification messages via the RS232 port on the

J2 triggers to interface with Home Control type software. Field 3*19 must be

set for RS232 (1).

NOTE: If enabled, the system also sends fault and restore messages via the

RS232 port.

*06 Quick Exit (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows users to exit the armed partition without disarming and then

rearming the partition.

Quick Exit is initiated by entering [#] + [9]. This restarts the exit delay. All rules

of exit apply, including exit error logic.

*08 Temporal Siren Pulse

Not used at this time.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-2

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*09 Entry Delay #1 (partition-specific)

Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = 240 seconds (4 minutes).

Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re-enter the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm

the system without sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within

this period or an alarm will occur. During entry time a distinct annunciation is

produced upon entry to warn the person entering the premise that entry delay

has begun. When the system is in Entry Delay, disarming is accomplished by

entering a valid user code. The annunciation silences upon entry of the first

digit of the user code. If an invalid user code is entered the annunciation

resumes.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. SIA

Guidelines: The entry delay time and Abort Window (field *88) combined

cannot exceed 60 seconds.

*10 Exit Delay #1 (partition-specific)

Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after

arming the system without setting off the alarm.

NOTE: The delay must be set for a minimum 60 seconds for SIA installations.

*11 Entry Delay #2 (partition-specific)

Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = 240 seconds (4 minutes).

Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than

those assigned to Entry Delay #1. During entry time a distinct annunciation is

produced upon entry to warn the person entering the premise that entry delay

has begun. When the system is in Entry Delay, disarming is accomplished by

entering a valid user code. The annunciation silences upon entry of the first

digit of the user code. If an invalid user code is entered the annunciation

resumes.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. SIA

Guidelines: The entry delay time and Abort Window (field *88) combined

cannot exceed 60 seconds.

*12 Exit Delay #2 (partition-specific)

Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those

assigned to Exit Delay #1.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL installations. The delay

must be set for a minimum 60 seconds for SIA installations.

*13 Bell 1 Timeout

Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.

00 = no timeout.

Defines the length of time the Bell 1 Output and the keypad’s sounder will

sound for all audible alarms.

Must be minimum 16 minutes for Commercial Burglary installations. Must be

minimum 6 minutes for Commercial Fire and SIA installations.

Trigger or RS232 Input

0 = trigger

1 = RS232 input

Select if J2 Pin 5 is being used as Fire Alarm trigger output or as an RS232

input. If set for RS232, this enables the system to receive serial data (75

baud).

NOTE: Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire installations.

*14

*15 Keyswitch Assignment

Enter 1-8 partition keyswitch is being used.

Enter 9 if the keyswitch is being used to

silence fire Notification Appliance Circuits in

the event of a fire alarm.

Enter 0 if the keyswitch is not used.

The keyswitch requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer

available as protection zone). The fire and panic alarm voltage triggers (J2)

automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for the Keyswitch

LEDs.

Openings/closing report as user “0” if enabled in field *40.

*16 Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming

Ding (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of

exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).

NOTE: If using a keyfob, when the button is pressed, either for arming or

disarming, the bell will ding indicating that the button is working.

Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.

*17 AC Loss Keypad Sounding

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) occurs when AC power is

lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

Must be 1 for Commercial Fire installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-3

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*19 Randomize AC Loss Report

0 = within 2 minutes

1 = 10-40 minutes

2 = 1-3 hours

3 = 6-12 hours without Type 13, 1-3 hours

with Type 13

If enabled, randomizes AC loss reporting within the selected time after an

actual AC loss.

If disabled (0), AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss.

Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the

central station during a community blackout.

Must be 2 for Commercial Fire installations.

*20 VIP Module Phone Code

1-9 = first digit of access code

∗

∗∗

∗ or # = second digit of access code (enter #

+11 for “∗”, or # +12 for “#”)

To disable enter 00 for the 1st digit

If a 4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used to

access the system.

Must be set to “00” for Commercial Fire and Commercial Burglary

installations.

*22 Keypad Panic Enables (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the keypad panics (zones 995, 996, and 999) may be used in this

partition. There are three entries in this field, one for each panic.

Use for Burglary panic types only.

Do not use on partition 1 on fire systems.

*24 Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper

0 = disable (tamper detection)

1 = enable (no tamper detection)

If disabled, the system monitors the tampers on expansion zones.

NOTE: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or

5800 Series transmitters.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

*25 Burglary Trigger for Response

Type 8

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows triggering of the voltage output 3 on Pin 3 of the J2 header

to include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).

*26 Intelligent Test Report

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, no test report is sent if any other type of report was sent since the

last test report.

If disabled, test reports are sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or

not any other report has been sent.

Must be 0 for Commercial Fire and UL Commercial Burglary installations.

*27 Test Report Interval

Enter 0001-9999 for the test report interval in

hours.

Enter 0000 for test reporting.

If a test report is desired, enter a test code in

Report Code Programming

#93 Menu Mode

. Set first test report time in field *83.

Maximum Test report interval is 0024 for Commercial Fire and Commercial

Burglary installations.

*28 Power-Up in Previous State

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system, upon power-up, reverts to its status prior to a complete

power loss.

If disabled, the system always powers up in a disarmed state.

NOTES:

Neither authority level 0 nor 5 can be used to disarm the system if the control

powers up armed.

When Power Up in Previous State is enabled, if the panel powers up armed, it

may take up to 3 minutes before an alarm is recognized and initiated.

Must be 1 for UL applications.

*29 Quick Arm (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT,

or MAXIMUM mode by using the [#] key instead of the user code.

NOTES:

When armed, the system reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for

User #2 (typically a Master level user) was enabled for a given partition.

If Quick Arm is used, the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot

disarm the system.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-4

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

Main Dialer TouchTone or Rotary

Dial

0 = rotary

1 = touchtone

Select the dialing method for the main dialer.

If you select TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service. Note that

whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling

(ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for TouchTone w/Rotary backup.

*30

*31 PABX Access Code

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers representing the prefix

needed to obtain an outside telco line. If not required, enter nothing and

proceed to next field.

*32 Primary Subscriber’s Account

Number (partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account

number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data

only in the first three locations, and enter * in the fourth location.

*33 Primary Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits. This is the

phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to

the central station. Do not fill unused spaces.

NOTE: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is

entered.

*34 Secondary Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits. The secondary phone

number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if

split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces.

NOTE: If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account number

(field *90)

must

also be programmed.

*35 Download Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits. Do not fill unused

spaces.

NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.

*36 Download ID Number

Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:

00=0 01=1 02=2 03=3 04=4 05=5

06=6 07=7 08=8 09=9 10=A 11=B

12=C 13=D 14=E 15=F

Enter eight digits.

NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.

*37 Download Command Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enabling a function means that you are able to perform that function via the

ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.

Functions are as follows: Dialer Shutdown; System Shutdown; Not Used;

Remote Bypass; Remote Disarm; Remote Arm; Upload Program; Download

Program.

For Commercial Burglary and Fire installations, all entries must be 0.

*38 Prevent Zone XXX Bypass

(partition-specific)

Enter a zone number (001-128).

Enter 000 if all zones can be bypassed.

Enter three digits for zone that cannot be bypassed by the user.

NOTES:

The actions manual bypass, group bypass, auto-stay, and STAY/INSTANT

arming modes cannot bypass any zone programmed in this field.

The system will not arm if the zone is programmed with the vent zone or force

arm fault attributes.

Force arm is not approved for ULC applications.

*39 Enable Open/Close Report for

Installer Code (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, whenever the Installer Code is used to arm or disarm the partition,

an open/close report is sent to the central station.

*40 Enable Open/Close report for

Keyswitch

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, whenever the keyswitch is used to arm or disarm the partition, an

open/close report is sent to the central station.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-5

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*41 Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones

3-8)

0 = EOLR supervision

1 = N.C. loops

If EOLR supervision is selected, end-of-line resistors must be used on zones

3-8.

If N.C. loops is selected, end-of-line resistors cannot be used and only

normally closed devices must be used.

Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

*42 Dial Tone Pause

Enter the wait time for dial tone detection:

0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; 2 = 30

seconds.

Enter the time the system waits for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true dial

tone is not selected in field *43.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

*43 Dial Tone Detection

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system waits for true dial tone. If no dial tone is detected,

control dials at end of pause programmed in field *42.

If disabled, the system pauses for seconds entered in field *42, then dials.

NOTE: Disabling may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks

where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.

*44 Ring Detection Count

Enter 00 to disable ring detection.

Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.

Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat

Mode

NOTES:

In the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once,

then hang up, and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing

one ring followed by nothing, does not answer the first call, but readies itself to

pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30

seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).

Must be set to “00” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

*45 Primary Format

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO

High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Enter the reporting format for the primary telephone number.

*46 Low Speed Format (Primary)

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed

1 = Sescoa/Radionics

Enter the low speed format for the primary telephone number.

*47 Secondary Format

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO

High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Enter the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.

*48 Low Speed Format (Secondary)

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed

1 = Sescoa/Radionics

Enter the low speed format for the secondary telephone number.

*49 Checksum Verification

Enter 2 digits, one for the primary and one

for the secondary.

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system for either or both primary/secondary formats sends a

verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send

two message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Select

0 = disable

1 = enable

If disabled, selects Radionics, which uses hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.

If enabled, selects Sescoa, which uses only numeric reporting (0-9).

NOTE: The selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

*51 Dual Reporting

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone

numbers.

NOTE: If used with Spilt Reporting "1" option (1*34), alarms and alarm

restores go to both primary and secondary numbers, while all other reports go

to secondary only. If used with Split Reporting "2" option, alarms and alarm

restores go to both, open/close and test messages go to secondary only,

while all other reports go to primary. If used with Split Reporting “3” option, fire

alarms and fire restore signals go to both, all other reports go to secondary

only.

NOTE: For Remote Station Applications, where separate transmission circuits

are required for Fire, Supervisory (when applicable), and Trouble signals,

option 3 must be enabled.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-6

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting

Primary

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,

Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the

primary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *45.

NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting

Secondary

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,

Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the

secondary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *47.

NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*54 Unattended Mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the installer may initiate an unattended download session by

entering Code #89.

NOTES:

Must be set to “0” for UL installations (downloading is not UL Listed).

The following fields must be programmed first: primary subscriber account

number – field *32; primary phone number – field *33; downloader phone

number – field *35. Or you can go into the Unattended Program Mode, from

normal operating mode, by entering Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [9].

*56 Dynamic Signaling Delay

Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds.

Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first

reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second

destination (first and second destinations are determined in field ✳57).

NOTES: A minimum of 45 seconds is recommended when the Communicator

is set to be the primary report path. If the delay is short (30 seconds or less),

the communications device does not have enough time to sent the

acknowledgement back to the panel, therefore the report would be sent out

via the dialer.

If the acknowledgment is received before the delay time expires, no message

is sent to the second destination.

*57 Dynamic Signaling Priority

0 = Primary Dialer

1 = Communicator

Select the initial reporting path for central station messages.

NOTE: Must be set to 0 for SIA installations.

*58 Communicator Central Station #1

Category Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, and Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the primary subscriber ID

of the Communicator.

*59 Communicator Central Station #2

Category Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, and Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the secondary subscriber

ID of the Communicator.

*77 Auto Trouble Restore

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, each trouble and supervisory condition automatically clears the

keypad display and stops the keypad beeping when the zone returns to a

“ready/normal” state. This applies to ALL trouble and supervisory types. The

system also sends the Trouble/Supervisory Restore report to the central

station, if programmed.

If a partition has more than one trouble/supervisory condition present at the

same time, the system automatically clears the keypad display of each zone

as it restores, but the keypad continues to beep until all the zones restore.

NOTE: If this option is set to 0 (disable) then the operation is that restore

reports will be sent to the CS when the actual restoral on the zone occurs,

however the keypad display will remain showing the condition until a valid

code is entered.

Must be 1 for Commercial Fire installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-7

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*79 Zone Type Restores for Zone

Types 1-8

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

*80 Zone Type Restores for Zone

Types 9, 10 & 14

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

Restores must be set to “1” for Commercial Fire installations.

*83 First Test Report Time

Enter 00-07the for day (01 = Monday)

Enter 00-23 for the hour

Enter 00-59 for the minutes

Enter the day and time that the first Test report shall be transmitted. Enter 00

in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting. Enter

00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the

time that is set.

*84 Swinger Suppression (partition-

specific)

01= 1 alarm

02= 2 alarms

Enter 00 for unlimited reports

This feature limits the number of times a non-fire zone locally annunciates and

transmits an alarm report to the central station, if a report is programmed, per

armed period.

A prompt has been added to Zone Programming for each zone to

enable/disable this option (Swinger Suppression Enable) with choices 0 = no

suppression; 1 = yes, suppress alarms according to field *88 selection.

NOTE: Fire zones are exempt from this requirement.

Must be set to “00“ for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

*85 Enable Dialer Reports for Panics

& Duress (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has four entries as follows: Zone 995, 996, 999, Duress Enable for

each partition that the panics and duress reporting is desired.

NOTE: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to

enable Duress reporting.

If you enable any of the panics to report, make sure field *22 is programmed

correctly for each partition.

*87 Entry Warning (partition-specific)

0 = 3 short beeps

1 = slow continuous beeps

Select the type of warning for the entry delay period.

*88 Abort Window (partition-specific)

1 = 15 seconds

2 = 30 seconds

3 = 45 seconds

The Abort Window exists for all non-fire zones. All non-fire alarm reports are

NOT transmitted to the central station, if the code sequence is entered

within the Abort Window.

Otherwise, non-fire alarm reports are transmitted to the central station, if

programmed to do so, if the code sequence is not entered during the

Abort Window.

A prompt has been added to Zone Programming for each zone to

enable/disable this option (Abort Window Enable) with choices 0 = no abort

window, 1 = yes, use abort window according to field *88 selection. Each

non-fire zone MUST be programmed with a 0 for UL installations.

This field must be set to (2) for SIA installations.

*89 Alarm Restore Report Timing

0 = Restore is sent when zone is restored or

at disarming, whichever occurs first.

1 = Restore is sent at disarming whether

zone is restored or not, or at bell timeout, but

only if restored.

2 = Restore is sent at disarming, whether the

zone is restored or not.

Select the time when restore reports are sent after an alarm.

This field applies only to Burglary zone types. It does not apply to Fire or

Panic zone types.

Must be set to “2” for Commercial Burglary installations.

*90 Secondary Subscriber Account

Number (partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account

number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data

only in the first three locations, and enter * in the fourth location.

NOTE: This field

must

be programmed if a secondary phone number is used

(field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary account

number.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-8

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*11 Zone Bypass After Disarm

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enter 1 for each partition in which zones will remain bypassed after disarm.

NOTES:

For each partition in which field 1✳11 is enabled, the USER CODE + OFF will

no longer unbypass zones. To unbypass ALL zones, you must enter USER

CODE + # + 64. To unbypass zones INDIVIDUALLY, you must enter USER

CODE + 6 + zone number.

Any zone that was automatically bypassed by the system will be unbypassed

upon disarming of the system (e.g., STAY mode, Auto-STAY, etc.).

Vent zones and zones bypassed by a programmed Auto-Bypass schedule

(Timed Driven Event) are considered “manual bypasses” and will not be

unbypassed upon disarming the system.

Zones that were in a bypassed state at the time a System Shutdown is sent

from the Compass Downloading software will be unbypassed when the

System Shutdown is removed.

1*12 Program Notification Signal

0 = no

1 = yes

If enabled, sends signal to central station indicating the system has been put

in programming mode.

Must be 1 for Commercial Fire installations.

1*13 System Sensor Reversing Relay

0 =use neither Zone 1 or Zone 2 inputs

1=use Zone 1 input;

2=use Zone 2 input;

3=use Zone 1 and Zone 2 inputs.

Selects zones for system sensor reversing relay.

Not Used.

1*15 Cancel Verify

0 = disable

1 = enable alarm output pulse upon kissoff of

Cancel report.

NOTE: Field 1✳52 must be enabled to send a Cancel report to the central

station.

1*17 Lobby Partition

0 = none; 1-8 = partition number

Select the Common Lobby Partition.

1*18 Affects Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, causes lobby partition to disarm when this partition disarms.

NOTE: This partition must be armed before lobby can be armed.

1*19 Arms Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the lobby

partition. Field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).

NOTES:

The lobby cannot be armed unless all partitions programmed for “affect” (field

1*18) is already armed.

If this field is enabled, Field 1*18 for this partition must also be enabled.

Exit Delay Reset

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, when the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the

user exits, closes the door and then re-enters the premises, the exit delay

time is reset to the programmed value.

NOTES:

Exit Delay Reset is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to

retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm.

This feature may only be activated once after arming. The Exit Delay must be

enabled for SIA installations.

Exit Delay Reset is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).

1*21

Cross-Zoning

Cross Zoning is not suitable for use in a UL installation.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-9

Cross Zoning is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5-minute period of each other to cause

an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones from causing an alarm condition. You can

select four "sets" of cross-zones (programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25), keeping in mind the following:

• Both zones in each set must protect the same area.

• Both zones in each set must be in the same partition.

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation

• In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a fault on the second zone

causes an alarm immediately.

• If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-zoning feature does not apply.

• Do not cross-zone entry/exit zones with interior follower zones as this will produce unpredictable results.

• If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay activates without the other zone being faulted.

• If a relay is programmed to activate on an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip before the relay activates, and both

zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).

If the one of the zones trips and the second zone does not trip within the 5-minute period, an “error” message is

reported to the central station. The Contact ID event code is 378.

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*22 Cross Zoning Pair One

Enter 001-128

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the first pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a 5-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be set to “000,000 “for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

1*23 Cross Zoning Pair Two

Enter 001-128

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the second pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a 5-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be set to “000,000” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

1*24 Cross Zoning Pair Three

Enter 001-128

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the third pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a 5-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be set to “000,000” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

1*25 Cross Zoning Pair Four

Enter 001-128

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the fourth pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a 5-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be set to “000,000” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

1*26 Panic Button or Speedkey

For A, B, C keys:

00 = panic function

01-32 = macro number

For D key:

00 = to select a macro to execute when key

is pressed

01-32 = macro number

Select for the A, B, and C keys whether the system performs a panic or a

speedkey function when the key is pressed.

Select for the D key whether the system performs a specific macro or if the

user will select a macro when the key is pressed.

1*28 RF Transmitter Low Battery

Sound

0 = disarmed state only

1 = both armed and disarmed states

Select when the RF transmitter low-battery condition should display and

audible beep annunciate on the keypad.

Must be 1 for Commercial Fire and UL Commercial Burglary installations.

1*29 RF Transmitter Low Battery

Reporting

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system sends a Trouble message for RF transmitter low-

battery condition to the central station.

NOTE: The Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure,

independent of this selection.

Must be 1 for Commercial Fire and UL Commercial Burglary installations.

1*30 RF Receiver Supervision Check-

in Interval

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

00 = disable receiver supervision.

Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF receiver(s).

Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered results in

the activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first

receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related

communication reports.

Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for Commercial Fire and UL Commercial Burglary

installations.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-10

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*31 RF Transmitter Check-in Interval

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

00 = disable transmitter supervision.

Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF transmitters.

Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time

entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report.

Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for Commercial Fire and UL Commercial Burglary

installations.

1*33 TouchTone with Rotary Backup

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system reverts to rotary dialing if communicator is not

successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.

1*34 Communicator Split Reporting

0 = Split Reporting disabled

1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore, and Cancel

reports to primary, all others to secondary

2 = Open/Close and Test reports to

secondary, all other reports to primary

3 = Fire Alarms and Fire Restores to primary

and secondary, all others to secondary

Select the type of split reporting for system communication.

NOTE: See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.

NOTE: Split reporting should not be used with Dynamic Signaling.

1*35 Access Control Dialer Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

There are six entries for this field as follows: Trace, Trouble, Not Used,

Bypass, System, and Alarm.

If Trace is enabled, access grant/denial events sent to the central station.

For the other events, if enabled, a report is sent to the central station.

Not Used.

1*42 Call Waiting Defeat

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system defeats Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to

both the primary and secondary numbers.

NOTES:

After the panel's initial call to report the alarm, the panel may attempt to make

an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral. If Call Waiting is

not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to contact the

premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) hears the phone ringing

indefinitely and must to dispatch on the call.

DO NOT enable this feature unless Call Waiting is being used.

1*43 Permanent Keypad Display

Backlighting (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.

Otherwise the backlighting comes on when a key is pressed.

NOTE: When a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in

that partition.

1*44 Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, when more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid

sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel disables the wireless keypad.

The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired

keypad.

Not Used. Must be disabled (“0”).

1*47 Chime on Bell 1 (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the Bell 1 output.

1*48 Wireless Keypad Assignment

0 = none

1-8 = partition number

Select the partition in which RF keypad is used.

Not Used. Must be set to “0”.

1*49 Suppress Transmitter

Supervision Sound

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, no trouble soundings occur on the keypad for transmitter check-in

failures.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-11

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*53 Disable Download Callback

0 = callback required

1 = no callback required

Select whether a callback from the control panel is required for downloading.

Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

1*55 European Date Format

0 = disable (mm/dd/yy)

1 = enable (dd/mm/yy)

Select the date format for display in the event log.

1*56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz

0 = 60Hz

1 = 50Hz

Select the frequency for the AC.

Must be set to 0 for U.S. and Canadian installations.

1*57 Enable 5800 RF Button Global

Arm

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system arms/disarms in accordance with the button’s user’s

global arming settings.

Must be 0 for Commercial Fire and Commercial Burglary installations.

1*58 Enable 5800 RF Button Force

Arm

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones

when arming the system.

NOTE: When attempting to arm the system, the keypad beeps once after the

button is pressed if any faulted zones are present. The user should then

press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and arm

the system.

NOTE: Force Arm is not approved for ULC applications.

1*60 Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, zone 5 is used for 2-way audio (AAV).

Must be set to “0” for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

NOTE: Zone 5 cannot be used as protection zone.

1*61 Abort Verify

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled and an alarm occurs on a non-fire zone, the system displays

“ALARM ABORTED”, if a user enters the code + off sequence during the

Abort Window (field *88).

1*70 Event Log Types

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Check, Bypass, Open/Close, and

System. If enabled, the system logs those events into the event log.

1*71 12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format

0 = 12-hour

1 = 24-hour

Select the type of time stamping for the event log.

1*72 Event Log Printer On-Line Mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system prints the events as they occur.

If disabled, the system prints the log only upon request.

1*73 Printer Baud Rate

0 = 1200

1 = 300

Select the baud rate for the serial printer.

1*74 Relay Timeout XXX Minutes

Enter 000-127 times 2 minutes (000-254).

This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers

“04/09” and

Output Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

output

command “56.”

1*75 Relay Timeout YYY Seconds

Enter 000-127 seconds.

This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers

“05/10” and

Output Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

command “57.”

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-12

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*76 Control Relay (partition-specific)

01-96 = relay number

00 = relay not used.

If enabled, the assigned relay closes for 2 seconds when the user enters his

code and presses 0.

Must be set to “00” for Commercial Fire and Burglary installations.

NOTE: See

SECTION 3: Installing the Control

for enhanced access control

capabilities.

1*77 Log 1st Main Signal

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system logs the first maintenance signal from each smoke

detector. If disabled, no logging occurs.

1*78 Extended Home Control Events

0 = limited

1 = extended

If extended, there are 255 commands to the home control command set. If

limited, there are 32 commands to the home control command set.

Home Control Automation is not allowed in UL installations.

1*79 Home Control Events

0 = disable

1 = enable

Select the type of events (status reports) transmitted via the RS232 output.

Home Control Automation is not allowed in UL installations.

1*80 Log Faults & Restores

0 = disable

1 = enable

When enabled automatically transfers data of the RS232 output.

Home Control Automation is not allowed in UL installations.

2*00 Number of Partitions

Enter 1-8.

Enter the number of partitions used in the system.

2*01 Daylight Saving Time Start/End

Month

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight saving time starts and ends.

Enter 00, 00 if daylight saving time does not apply to the user’s region.

Standard setting for U.S. is 03, 11.

2*02 Daylight Saving Time Start/End

Weekend

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight saving time as follows: 1=first;

2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last.

Standard setting for U.S. is 2, 1.

2*05 Auto-Arm Delay (partition-

specific)

00 = no delay.

01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.

15 = no auto arming.

This is the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto-

arm warning time (field 2*06).

NOTE: This field must be set to “00” for UL installations.

2*06 Auto-Arm Warning Period

(partition-specific)

01-15 times 1-minute warning.

00 = no warning period.

This is the time that the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to

exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.

NOTE: This field must be set to “00” for UL installations.

2*07 Auto-Disarm Delay (partition-

specific)

00 = no delay.

01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.

15 = no auto disarming.

This is the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto

disarming of the system.

NOTE: This field must be set to “15” for UL864 compliance.

2*08 Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system automatically bypasses any faulted zones when it

attempts to auto-arm.

If disabled, the system does not auto-arm.

NOTE: Force arm is not approved for ULC applications.

NOTE: This field must be set to “0” for UL installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-13

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*09 Open/Close Reports by

Exception (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, Open/Close reports are sent only if the openings/closings occur

outside the arm and disarm windows.

NOTES:

Open reports are also suppressed during the closing window in order to

prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then re-enters the premises,

for example to retrieve a forgotten item.

Openings and closings are still recorded in the event log.

This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be

sent.

2*10 Allow Disarming Only During

Arm/Disarm Windows (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, disarming of the system is allowed only during the

arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1).

NOTE: This applies only to Operator-level users. Installer, Master, and

Manager-level users can disarm the system at any time.

2*11 Allow Disarm Outside Window if

Alarm Occurs

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm

(opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Otherwise disarming is allowed

only during the disarm window.

NOTE: Used only if field 2*10 is enabled.

2*18 Enable GOTO for this Partition

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, this partition can be accessed from another partition’s keypad

using the GOTO command.

NOTE: Must be disabled “0” for partition 1 in Commercial Fire installations.

2*19 Use Partition Descriptor

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the normal keypad display will include a partition number and 4-

digit descriptor.

2*20 Enable J2 Triggers for Partition

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the J2 triggers function for this partition.

2*21 Supervision Pulses for LRR

0 = disable

1 = enable

Silent Panic/Duress, Supervisory, and Trouble.

If enabled, causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J2 LRR

triggers to the LRR. The LRR uses these pulses to determine that its

connection to the control is still intact.

Must be set to “0000” for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

Not Used.

2*22 Display Fire Alarms of Other

Partitions (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at

this partition’s keypad(s).

NOTE: Must be disabled “0” for partition 1 in Commercial Fire installations.

2*23 Display Burg, Panic and CO

Alarms for Other Partitions

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows burglary, panic and CO alarms that occur on other partitions

to be displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).

NOTE: Must be disabled “0” for partition 1 in Commercial Fire installations.

2*24 Display Troubles of Other

Partitions (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this

partition’s keypad(s).

NOTE: Must be disabled “0” for partition 1 in Commercial Fire installations.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-14

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

3*00 Check or TRBL Display

0 = CHECK

1 = TRBL

Select whether the system should display CHECK or TRBL when a trouble

condition occurs.

3*01 Event Display Lock

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system locks the display on the first fire alarm. Press ✳ to

display the next fire alarm in the system. If disabled, the system scrolls all

alarms automatically.

When 3*01 is Enabled, the following priorities go into effect:

The First event to occur is locked on the display; subsequent events will be

displayed in priority order:

Priority 1: Life Safety: ZT 06, 07, 09, 16, 17, and Duress override all other s

below

Priority 2: Property Safety: ZT 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 10 override all other s below

Priority 3: Supervisory: ZT 14, 18, 19 and Fire Trouble override all other s

below

Priority 4: System: AC Loss, Low Bat, Line Cut, etc. do not override any other

events

NOTE: Must be set to “1” for Commercial Fire installations.

3*12 Zone Type 18 Delay Use

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, use the delay time programmed in field 3✳16.

3*13 Fire Supervisory Response to

Open/Short (Applies to Zone

Type 18)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If “0” is selected, the system will respond with a trouble on open, and a

supervisory on short.

If “1” is selected, the system will respond with a supervisory on open, and a

supervisory on short.

Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire and Commercial Burglary installations.

3*14 Waterflow Alarm Silence Option

0 = silenced by User Code + OFF

1 = silenced when zone restores

Select how the Waterflow zone type will be silenced.

NOTES:

This feature may be set to 1 only by permission of the local authority.

For an output of a 4204CF to be silenced when 3*14=1, all Type 17

(Waterflow) zones activating the output must be put into a Zone List, and that

Zone List must be the STP condition of the 4204CF fire output. In addition to

the STP ZL, you also need an STP ZT of 22 in order to silence via code + off

in the event the zone does not restore.

Since a Type 17 zone is processed as a FIRE alarm, it will activate outputs

programmed for STT ZT 17, 16, 09, and 39. The only way to have individual

output activations (e.g. ZT17 versus ZT09) is to use zone lists.

NOTE: Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire installations.

3*16 Zone Types 17 & 18 Delay

Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds

Enter 00 for no delay

Select the delay time for zone types 17 and 18. The zone must be faulted for

entire delay time before an alarm or supervisory condition occurs. This may

prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow.

Maximum combined delay of3*16 and 3*18 cannot exceed 90 seconds for UL

installations.

NOTE: Must be set to “00” for Commercial Fire installations.

3*17 Zone 6 Alternate Function Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, zone 6 may be used as a tamper zone (bell and cabinet tampers).

If used, the zone will annunciate in accordance with response type, rather

than a ground fault when a ground fault is detected.

3*18 Extended Delay for Zone Types

17 & 18

0 = no extended delay

1 = multiply delay by 4

This option allows the delay programmed in field 3✳16 for Waterflow and

Supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times.

NOTE: Must be set to “0” for Commercial Fire installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-15

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

3*19 Auxiliary Input Alternate

Function Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, pins 5 and 9 on the J2 connector function as RS232 output and

input, respectively. If disabled, they function as fire alarm trigger and

communications device Xmit Okay. See the chart at field 3*20 for the J2

trigger configurations.

NOTE: If field 3*19 is enabled, you cannot use a communications device

connected to the J2 trigger.

3*20 Trigger Outputs Function

Selection

0 = remote keypad sounder

1 = keyswitch LEDs

Select the function of the J2 trigger outputs. See chart below.

J2 Pin Field 3*19 = 0

Field3*20 = 0

Field 3*19 = 0

Field3*20 = 1 Field 3*19 = 1

1 Panic Alarm Panic Alarm As selected in field 3*20

2 Trouble Trouble As selected in field 3*20

3 Burglary Alarm Burglary Alarm As selected in field 3*20

4 Fire Supervisory Fire Supervisory As selected in field 3*20

5 Fire Alarm Fire Alarm RS232 Output

6 Remote Console

Sounder Keyswitch Ready LED As selected in field 3*20

7 Open/Close Keyswitch Armed LED As selected in field 3*20

8 Ground Ground Ground

9 Communicator Xmit Okay Communicator Xmit Okay RS232 Input

3*21 Maximum Number of Dialer

Attempts

Enter the number of dialing attempts 1-8.

Select the maximum number of dialer attempts for the system.

NOTE: Must be 3, 4, or 5 for NFPA 72 compliant systems if a secondary

phone number is programmed.

3*30 Dialer Selection

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for each dialer (main and backup). Enter 1 if the

dialer is being used.

NOTE: If 3*30 is disabled (0, 0), the panel does not report at all via

communications device.

3*31 Backup Dialer TouchTone or

Rotary

0 = rotary

1 = touchtone

Select the dialing method for the backup dialer.

3*50 Zone Type Restore Enables for

Types 16-18

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations

3*55 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 1

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system silences bell 1 output when the second User Code +

OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system silences bell 1

output after the first User Code + OFF.

3*56 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 2

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system silences bell 2 output when the second User Code +

OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system silences bell 2

output after the first User Code + OFF.

3*57 Confirmation of Arming Ding Bell

2 & Auxiliary Relay

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If

enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of

exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).

NOTE: If using a keyfob, when the button is pressed, either for arming or

disarming, the bell will ding indicating that the button is working.

Must be 1 for Commercial Burglary installations.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

5-16

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

3*59 Enable Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay

Chime Annunciation

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If

enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the output.

NOTE: Must be set to “0” if Bell 2 or Aux. Relay is used for Fire.

3*60 Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Timeout

Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.

00 = no timeout.

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay.

Defines the length of time the output and the keypad’s sounder will sound for

all audible alarms.

NOTE: Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for Commercial Burglary

installations and a minimum 6 minutes for UL Commercial Fire installations.

3*61 Auxiliary Relay Function

Selection

0 = trouble/supervisory

1 = alarm, silenced by User Code + OFF

2 = smoke detector reset

3 = battery save

4 = alarm, silenced by User Code + # + 67

Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay.

NOTES:

Select “4” for applications requiring independent resetting of the relay.

Smoke detector reset triggers the relay momentarily (approximately 6

seconds) on the second User Code + OFF entry.

Battery save is used to disconnect power from non-critical loads 4 hours after

AC loss.

3*82 Burglary Features on Partition 1

Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, arming, test and chime modes can be used on partition 1.

NOTES:

These features are automatically enabled on all other partitions.

Must be set to “0” in Commercial Fire installations.

3*85 System Zone Bypass Inhibit

0 = prevent bypass

1 = allow only installer to bypass

2 = allow only installer and master codes to

bypass

Select which codes, if any, can bypass fire zones and systems zones.

NOTES:

This applies to fire zones programmed with zone types 9, 16, 17, and 18 and

system zones 970-977.

The bypassing can only be done from partition 1.

6-1

SECTION 6

Scheduling Options

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

ULC Scheduling is currently not approved for ULC applications.

• You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.

• Auto-disarming is not permitted in UL installations.

• You must not program Random Scheduling of Time Driven Events for UL installations.

General

The scheduling features allow certain operations to be

automated, such as arming, disarming, bypassing of

zones, and activating relay outputs.

The system uses time windows (a programmed period of

time with a start and stop time) for defining open/close

schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary

schedules, and access schedules for users.

Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly

menu modes of programming (#80, #81, #83, and #93

modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus

take you step by step through the options.

Auto Arming

The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a

partition at the end of a pre-determined closing

(arming) time window.

Auto Arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the

Auto-Arm Delay, the Auto-Arm Warning, or by

manually extending the closing (arming) time window

with a keypad command.

The system can also automatically bypass any open

zones when auto arming.

Auto-Arm Delay

Auto-Arm Delay provides a delay (grace period) before

auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing time

window.

The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56

minutes in partition-specific program field 2*05. At the

expiration of this delay, the Auto-Arm Warning will

start.

Auto-Arm Warning

The Auto-Arm Warning causes the keypad sounder to

warn the user of an impending Auto-Arm.

The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to

the arming in partition-specific program field 2*06.

During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds

and displays “AUTO ARM ALERT.” During the last 60

seconds, the keypads beep every 5 seconds.

The panel arms at the conclusion of the Auto-Arm

Warning period.

Extend Closing Window

A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time

window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a

keypad command (User Code + #82), which then

prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of

1 or 2.

This feature is useful if a user must stay on the

premises later than usual.

The Auto-Arm delay and warning periods begin at the

end of the extension.

Force Arm

ULC Force Arming is not approved for ULC

applications.

The Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to

bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming (panel

performs a force-arm).

This option is set in partition-specific program field

2*08.

Auto Disarming

The system can automatically disarm a partition at the

end of a pre-determined opening (disarm) time window.

The disarming time can be delayed by using the Auto-

Disarm Delay feature.

Disarm Delay

Auto-Disarm Delay provides a delay before auto

disarming. This delay is added to the end of the disarm

time window.

The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56

minutes, in partition-specific program field 2*07.

Restrict Disarming

This option allows disarming by users only during the

disarm time window and during the arming time

window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after

manually arming the partition).

This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10. If field

2*10 is set, we highly recommend setting field 2*11, as

well. This field allows the partition to be disarmed

outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the

partition is in alarm.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-2

Exception Reports

This option allows the reporting of openings and

closings to the central station only if the arming and

disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening

and closing time windows. It is set in partition-specific

field 2*09.

The system can be programmed to send Failed to Open

and Failed to Close reports if the partition is not armed

or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time

window.

Limitation of Access of Users by Time

A user’s access to the system can be limited to a certain

time period. Outside this time, that user’s code is

inactive. The system provides up to eight access

schedules, each consisting of two time windows

(typically one for opening, one for closing) for each day

of the week and two time windows for holidays.

The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu

Mode, and enabled when a user’s access code is added

to the system.

If a user tries to operate the system outside the

schedule, the alpha keypad displays “Access Denied.”

Time-Driven Events

The system can automatically activate and de-activate

relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other

devices on and off. The Time-Driven events can be

activated at different times in relation to a time

window:

• At the beginning of a time window

• At the end of a time window

• During a time window (on at beginning of window,

off at end)

• At both the beginning and end of the time window

(e.g., to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a

coffee break)

• Random time at the start of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the start of the time

window)

• Random time at the end of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)

• Random during the time window (begins within 30

minutes after the start of the time window and ends

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)

The system can perform the same actions on a daily

basis, or can perform an action only once (e.g., turn on

the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 PM).

The system also provides up to 20 programmable

“timers” available to the end user for the purpose of

activating output devices at preset times and days.

Time Window Definitions

Scheduled events are based on time windows, (periods

of time) during which an event may take place. The

system supports up to 20 time windows, each defined by

a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.

The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are

used when programming the various schedules

(open/close, limitation of access), as well as for Time-

Driven event control.

Scheduling Example

A store that has the following hours:

Monday to Friday 9am to 6pm

Saturday 10am to 4pm

Sunday Closed

Holidays Closed

The owner desires the following time windows to allow

time for employees to arm or disarm the system:

Monday to Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm

Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am

Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm

Sunday & Holidays Closed

For this schedule, the four time windows need to be

programmed:

Window Start Stop Purpose

1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window

2 9am 10am Saturday open window

3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window

4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Fri. close window

Using the #80 Menu Mode, the installer can program

open/close schedules by assigning a time window to a

day of the week (windows are entered as 2-digit entries)

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl

01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00

NOTE: 00 is entered for those days on which the store

is closed.

Employees can arm and disarm the system, when

programmed, within the open and close time windows

without causing a report to be sent to the central

station (reporting by exception, field 2*09). The system

can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in

case an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-

arm/auto-disarm).

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-3

Open/Close Schedules Definitions

General

The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three

schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window

for openings and one time window for closings.

There are three types of schedules available: Daily,

Holiday, and Temporary.

Daily Schedule

Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of

one opening window and one closing window per day.

Holiday Schedule

A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily schedule

on selected holidays throughout the year.

The opening and closing windows are programmed in

the daily schedule, but the holidays themselves are

defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80

Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedule

The temporary schedule provides a method for the end

user to override the daily and holiday schedules. It

consists of one opening window and one closing window

for each day of the week. The schedule takes effect for

up to one week, after which it is automatically

deactivated.

This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary

Schedule Menu Mode.

Additional Schedules

Additional opening and closing schedules can be

programmed using the Time-Driven Event

Programming. For example, a schedule for normal

store openings/closings can be programmed with a daily

open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for

a lunch hour can be programmed using the Time-

Driven event schedule programming.

Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for

detailed information.

Open/Close Reports by Exception

The system can help reduce communication traffic to

the central station by using the Open/Close Reports by

Exception feature. The Open/Close by Exception option

suppresses these reports from being sent to the central

station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected

time window. Reports are only sent if the arm or

disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.

The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in

its event log.

If a disarming occurs during a closing window (for

example, a person who arms the system forgets

something and has to re-enter), the Opening report

(although outside of the opening window) will not be

sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the

closing window).

This option is programmed in partition-specific program

field 2*09.

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling

The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.

6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM

Early Opening reports are

sent if system is manually

disarmed before opening

window begins.

Early and Late Opening

and Closing reports are

programmable options

in Report Code

Programming in the

Programming Guide

They are not dependent

on the programming of

the Exception

Reporting option.

Opening Window

No reports are sent if

system is disarmed

during this time

window.

If an arming occurs,

a Closing report is

sent to the central

station regardless of

how the Exception

Reporting option is

set.

Auto-disarm delay begins.

Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if

auto-disarm is enabled).

Missed Opening reports are sent

if manual disarming has not

occurred at expiration of opening

window.

Late Opening reports are sent if

disarm occurs after the opening

window expires.

Early Closing reports are sent if

manual arming occurs before the

closing window begins.

Missed Opening/Closing type

reports are programmed in

Report Code Programming in

the

Programming Guide

. The

Exception Reporting option

must be set for these to be

sent.

Closing Window

No reports are sent

if system is armed*

during this time

window.

* or disarmed if

user needs to re-

enter premises.

Auto-arm delay begins.

Auto-arm warning begins.

Auto-arm occurs after

warning expires (if auto-

arm is enabled).

Missed Closing reports are

sent if manual arming has

not occurred at expiration

of closing window.

Late Closing reports are

sent if system is manually

armed after the closing

window expires.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-4

Scheduling Menu Mode

The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program

most of the scheduling and timed-event options. Enter

Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [0] from the normal

operating mode. NOTE: Only users with an Installer or

Master level user code may enter the #80 mode.

The following can be programmed while in this mode:

• time windows

• open/close schedules to each partition

• holiday schedules

• Time-Driven events (for system functions and relay

activation)

• limitation of access schedules

Some scheduling features are programmed in Data

Field Programming Mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 0).

Some features are programmed in the #93 Menu Mode.

The programming scheduling fields are listed below.

System-Wide Fields:

*04 Enable Random Timers

1*74 –1*75 Relay timeout values

2*01-2*02 Daylight saving time options

2*11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm

occurs

Partition-Specific fields:

1*76 Access control relay for this partition

2*05 Auto-arm delay value

2*06 Auto-arm warning time

2*07 Auto-disarm delay value

2*08 Force-arm enable

2*09 Open/Close Reporting by Exception

2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows

#93 Menu Mode (System Group #3)

Scheduling related report codes

Event-driven options are programmed using Output

Programming in #93 Menu Mode. Relay activation can

also be Time-Driven and that those are programmed

using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-Driven

Event Programming later in this section for the

procedure.

Steps to Program Scheduling Options

This section contains examples of the

worksheets only. For complete worksheets,

see the

Programming Guide

accompan

this

Installation and Setup Guide.

In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the

worksheets to do the following:

1. Define time windows (up to 20)

2. Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule

per day, per partition)

3. Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to

16)

4. Define limitation of access times (up to eight

schedules)

5. Define the Time-Driven events (up to 20)

NOTE: Temporary schedules are programmed using

#81 Menu Mode.

Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the

following functions:

6. Program the time windows

7. Program the open/close schedules

8. Program the Time-Driven events

9. Program the access schedules

Scheduling Menu Structure

To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:

Installer Code + [#] + [80]. (Installer or Master level

user code.)

Scheduling Program Mode can be entered only

when all partitions are disarmed.

There are six procedures of scheduling menus accessed via #80, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main menu

prompt selects that menu procedure. Prompts for programming that scheduling feature then appear. Enter 0 to skip a

procedure and display the next menu option.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Time Window ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt appears. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to

Time

Windows Programming

later in this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.

O/C Schedules ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to

Open/Close Schedules Programming

later in

this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.

Holidays ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to

Holiday Schedule Programming

later in this section for

detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.

Timed Events ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional schedules, and other system functions. Refer

Time-Driven Event Programming

later in this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-5

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Access Sched. ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to

Limitation of

Access Schedules Programming

later in this

section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Quit?” prompt.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to quit

#80 Scheduling Menu Mode

and return to normal operating mode.

Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options. If you press 0, the “Time

Window?” prompt is displayed.

Time Windows

The system provides 20 time windows that are defined

with start and stop times. These windows are used for

various open/close and access schedules, as well as for

output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling

system. These windows are shared among all 8

partitions.

Time Windows Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. This worksheet will

help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of

this system before you program them. Note that time

windows can span midnight; for example, from 11 PM

to 1 AM.

Time Window

Number

Start Time

(HH:MM)

Stop Time

(HH:MM)

3…..20

A time window must have a start and a stop time.

Time Windows Programming

Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code +

[#] + [80]. The keypad displays the Time Window

Programming prompt.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Time Window ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.

Time Window # ?

01-20, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be programmed.

Press [✳] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Time Window #?” prompt to quit time window

programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 TIME WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

If you entered a time window number, the cursor is now positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of

window entry.

Enter the desired start of window hour and press [✳]. The cursor moves to the minutes position. Enter the

desired minutes and press [✳]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is

under the A/P position and then press [✳]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.

When the entry is completed, the “Time Window #?” prompt is displayed again.

Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Because the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing a

time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-6

Daily Open/Close Schedules

Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close

schedule, plus a holiday schedule. Temporary

schedules are programmed separately, using the #81

Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program

additional open/close schedules, see Time-Driven Events

Programming later in this section for the procedure.

Open/Close Schedule Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. Write the previously

defined time window numbers for open and close for

each partition.

Part Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl

3…8

Open/Close Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

O/C Schedules ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

Partition # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following open/close schedules will apply.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Partition #?” prompt to quit open/close schedules programming and display the “Quit

?” prompt.

Mon P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day’s opening schedule beginning with Monday.

Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has

been stored for that window number is displayed as a programming aid.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.

Mon P1 CL WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number for the displayed day’s closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window number is displayed.

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.

Tue P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

The keypad now prompts for Tuesday’s open/close schedule. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.

When the last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday opening and closing window prompts are

displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time windows.

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.

When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for

each partition in the system.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Holiday Schedules

A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year.

The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can be assigned to any

combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for

which these holidays apply.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-7

Holiday Schedule Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet found in the Programming Guide.

HOL Partition

Month/Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 /

2 /

3…16

Holiday Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Holidays ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?

01-16,00=Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed and press [✳] to accept entry.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 ENTER DATE

00/00

The cursor is now positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press [✳] to

proceed to the day field.

Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.

Part ? 12345678

Hit 0-8 x x

Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press [0] to turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to

toggle the letter “x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.

Press the [✳] key when all desired partitions have been assigned.

The “Holiday Number?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be

programmed.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Time-Driven Events

These schedules are used to activate outputs, bypass

zones, etc. based on time. There are 20 of these

schedules that may be programmed for the system,

each governed by the previously defined time windows.

The actions that can be programmed to automatically

activate at set times are: relay commands, arm/disarm

commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close

access conditions.

Time-Driven Events Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. Fill out the

worksheet using the steps outlined below.

Automatic Refresh Feature

The system automatically updates the status of all

Time-Driven Events upon any of the following

occurrences:

• Changing of the time or date via #63 mode

• Exiting #80 Scheduling Menu mode

• Exiting Program mode

• After a disconnect from the downloader

• On a power-up

• At Daylight Saving Time adjustment.

Sched Time Days Action Action Activation

Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time

3…20

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-8

1. Enter the schedule number (01-20) and time

window number (01-20), and note the day of the

week the action is desired.

2. Enter the code for the desired action and

action specifier. The action codes represent the

events that are to take place when the scheduled

time is reached. Each action also requires an

action specifier, which defines what the action will

affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user

group). The action specifier varies, depending on

the type of action selected.

The following is a list of the Action Codes (desired

actions) used when programming Time-Driven events.

Note that these codes are independent of the relay

codes programmed during Output Programming in the

#93 Menu Mode.

Relay Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

01 Relay On Relay #

02 Relay Off Relay #

03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay #

04 Relay Close XX minutes (set

in field 1*74) Relay #

05 Relay Close YY seconds (set

in field 1*75) Relay #

06 Relay Group On Relay Group #

07 Relay Group Off Relay Group #

08 Relay Group Close for 2

seconds Relay Group #

09 Relay Group Close XX

minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay Group #

10 Relay Group Close YY

seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay Group #

Arm/Disarm Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

20 Arm-STAY Partition(s)

21 Arm AWAY Partition(s)

22 Disarm Partition(s)

23 Force Arm STAY (Auto-

bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

24 Force Arm AWAY (Auto-

bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

25 Arm INSTANT Partition(s)

26 Arm MAXIMUM Partition(s)

• The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies

when using Time-Driven events to auto-arm.

• Temporary schedules do not override an

auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed

in Time-Driven events.

• The auto-arming window cannot be extended

using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.

Bypass Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

30 Auto bypass – Zone list Zone list #

31 Auto unbypass – Zone list Zone list #

Open/Close Windows

Action Code Action Action Specifier

40 Enable Opening Window by

partition Partition(s)

41 Enable Closing Window by

partition Partition(s)

42 Enable Access Window for

access group Access Group

50 Off-Normal Reminder

(starts local keypad beeping if

fire or system trouble

condition exists)

None

Access Control Commands 55-78 Not Used

3. Enter the desired activation time (when the

action is to take place). Select from:

Activation

Time Description

1 Beginning of time window.

2 End of time window.

3 During time window active period only (on at

beginning of window, off at end).

For example, if bypass is selected to activate during

the window, zones in a zone list are bypassed at the

beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end

of the window.

4 Beginning and end of time window (e.g., a coffee

break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is

selected, the relay pulses for 2 seconds at the

beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of

the coffee break. At the end of the window it pulses

again, signaling the end of coffee break.

5 Random time at the start of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the start of the time window).

NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “5”

occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the

window, the time window duration must be at least

30 minutes.

6 Random time at the end of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).

7 Random during the time window (begins within 30

minutes after the start of the time window and ends

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).

NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “7”

occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the

window, the time window duration must be at least

30 minutes.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-9

Field *04 must be enabled for randomization. A user

must initiate a random schedule by entering one of the

following sequences:

• [User Code] + [#] + [41]. This will randomize, up

to 30 minutes, the activation time of all devices,

programmed for randomization, assigned to the

partition the sequence is entered in. Enter the

sequence again to turn off the random schedule.

• [User Code] + [#] + [42]. This is the same as the

method above, except the randomization occurs

only on devices with activation times within 6 PM

and 5 AM. Enter the same sequence again to turn

off the random schedule.

UL You must not program Random Scheduling of

Time Driven Events for UL installations.

Time-Driven Event Programming

The following menu items must first be programmed in

Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:

Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)

Output Group (if applicable)

Restriction (#70) (Restriction must be set to yes for

Commercial Fire installations.)

Output Type (V-Plex or 4204/4204CF)

Zone No. (V-Plex)

ECP Address (4204/4204CF)

Relay No. (4204/4204CF)

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until

the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Timed Events ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program timed events.

TIMED EVENT # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).

Press [✳].

The system then prompts the user to enter the desired action to be taken.

Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 ACTION ?

none 00

Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list at the left. This could be an output command,

an arming command, or any other Time-Driven event.

Press [✳] to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier appears.

ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER

01=Relay On

02=Relay Off

03=Relay Close for 2 seconds

04=Relay Close XX minutes

05=Relay Close YY seconds

Actions 01-05

If you selected actions 01-05, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay

number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY # ?

06=Relay Group On

07=Relay Group Off

08=Relay Group Close for 2

seconds

09=Relay Group Close XX

minutes

10=Relay Group Close YY

seconds

Actions 06-10

If you selected actions 06-10, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay

group number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY GRP # ?

20=Arm-STAY

21=Arm AWAY

22=Disarm

23=Force Arm STAY

24=Force Arm AWAY

25=Arm INSTANT

26=Arm MAXIMUM

40=Enable Open Window by

Part.

41=Enable Close Window by

Part.

Actions 21-26 and 40-41

If you selected actions 21-26 or 40-41, the prompt at the right appears. Enter

the partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter

a partition number again to deselect it.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X X

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-10

ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER

30=Auto bypass – Zone list

31=Auto unbypass – Zone list

Actions 30-31

If you selected actions 30-31, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the zone

list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 ZONE LIST ?

ENTER 01-15 01

42=Enable Access Window for

Access group(s)

Action 42

If you selected action 42, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the group

number to which the time window will apply.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

GROUP ? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X

50=Off-Normal Reminder Action 50

No action specifier is required for this action since the condition that this

occurs for are system-wide.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

01 Time Window ?

00:00 00:00 01

Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the time window number is displayed.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

01 Active time ?

Enter the activation time from 1-10 (listed below). As the number is keyed in, the activation time is

displayed. The choices are:

1: Trigger at the start of the window.

2: Trigger at the end of the window.

3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.

4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window. Example: coffee break buzzer.

5: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the start of the window.

6: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the end of the window.

7: Take effect only for the duration of the window, but random start and end the window up to 30 minutes.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Days ? MTWTFSSH

Hit 0-8 x x

The system then asks for which days the event is to be activated.

Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday

= 1, Holiday = H = 8).

When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt is displayed again.

Repeat the procedure for each timed event for the installation.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit

Scheduling Menu Mode.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-11

Limitation of Access Schedules

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user’s access

code is limited to working during a certain period of

time. The system provides eight Access Schedules, each

of which consists of two time windows for each day of

the week and two time windows for holidays (typically,

one for an opening time window and the second for a

closing time window). A user, required to follow a

schedule, would be assigned to an access group of the

same number (e.g., schedule 1= group 1).

The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that

user is added to the system. If no limitations apply,

enter 0.

Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet

Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.

Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol

Sch W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2

3…8

NOTE: The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-12

Limitation of Access Schedules Programming

To program access schedules enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu

Mode, press [0] until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Access Sched. ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules.

ACCESS SCHED # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

MON A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time-window number (01-20) for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is

keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

MON A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time-window number from 01-20 for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the

number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

TUE A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the last day of the week has been programmed,

the windows for holidays may be entered.

Hol A1 Window 1 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Hol A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedules

Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule,

which overrides the regular open/close schedule (and

the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as

soon as it is programmed, and remains active for up to

one week.

Only users with the authority level of manager or

higher can program temporary schedules.

A temporary schedule affects only the partition from

which it is entered. Temporary schedules can also be

reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#])

to the “DAYS?” prompt and activating the appropriate

days. This should be considered when defining daily

time windows.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-13

Temporary Schedule Worksheet

Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

1 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

2…8 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Temporary Schedules Programming

Enter User Code + [#] + 81 to enter this mode.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Mon DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm (opening) window for Monday.

Upon entry of this mode, the cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm

window. Enter the desired hour.

Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.

Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

Press [✳] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing) window for Monday.

Pressing [#] scrolls you through the prompts without making any changes.

Mon ARM WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm (closing) window for Monday.

The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window. Enter the hour.

Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.

Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

After the windows for that day have been completed, the system prompts for disarm and arm time windows

for the next day.

Press [#] if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.

When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the system prompts for which days of the

schedule are to be activated.

Days ? MTWTFSS

Hit 0-7 x x

This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule.

To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “X” appears under that day, indicating the

temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0

toggles all days on/off.

The temporary schedule is in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week

progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other entries for the temporary schedule

remain programmed.

Press [✳] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any

changes.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

6-14

User Scheduling Menu Mode

The system provides up to 20 “timers” available to the end user to control output devices. The output devices themselves

are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. The end user

needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.

The installer may set certain outputs to be “restricted” during Output Programming (this prevents the end user from

controlling doors, pumps, Notification Appliance Circuits, etc.)

To enter this mode, the user enters User Code + [#] + 83.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Output Timer # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press [✳] to accept entry and move to the next

prompt.

Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P

PORCH LITE 04

If that timer number has already been programmed, a summary screen appears. In this example:

06 = Timer #

07:00PM = Start Time

11:45PM = Stop Time

PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4

04 = Output Device # affected by this timer

Press [✳] to continue.

06 ENTER OUTPUT#

PORCH LITE 04

Enter the desired output number (01-96). As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device is

displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an output

descriptor of “None.” Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

06 ON TIME ?

07:00 PM

The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the ON time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move

to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by

hitting any key from 0-9 while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [✳] to continue.

06 OFF TIME ?

11:45 PM

The cursor positioned on the tens of hours digit of the OFF time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move

to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by

hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [✳] to continue.

06 DAYS? MTWTFSS

HIT 0-7 x x

To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “x” appears under that day, indicating the

output for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0 toggles all

days on/off.

The outputs are in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses,

the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent option is selected (next screen

prompt).

When completed, press [✳] to continue.

06 Permanent ?

0 = NO,1 = YES 0

Selecting “Permanent” (1) means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis. Selecting 0

means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter “x” under the day is then cleared, but

all other entries for the output device remain programmed.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

The system quits User Scheduling Mode and returns to normal operating mode.

7-1

SECTION 7

Downloading Primer

(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

Downloading allows the operator to remotely access,

program, and control the security system over normal

telephone lines, IP, or GSM Communicators. Anything

that can be done directly from the keypad can be done

remotely, using ADEMCO’s COMPASS downloading

software. To communicate with the control panel, the

following is required:

1. IBM PC-compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with

100 MB of available hard disk space and at least

8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X,

Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT.

Phone Line Up Load/ Downloading

1. One of the following modems:

• ADEMCO CIA

• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2

or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)

• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external

• Hayes Optima 336

• BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume

• BizComp Intellimodem 2400

Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to

be 100% compatible.

Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP

switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch

will not work.

2. Compass revision 1.5.8 or above.

IP/GSM Downloading

Revision 4.0 and above panels can be downloaded via

the ECP bus over the following Communicators:

• 7845i-ent

• 7845i-GSM

• 7845-GSM

Access Security

The following four levels of protection guard the control

against compromise while it is being accessed from a

remote location:

1. Security code handshake: The subscriber’s account

number as well as an 8-digit ID number (known

only to the office) must be matched between the

control and computer.

2. Hang-up and callback: The control panel “hangs

up” and calls the computer back at the pre-

programmed number only if the security codes

match.

3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged

between the computer and control is encrypted to

reduce the possibility of anyone “tapping” the line

and corrupting data.

4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned

various levels of access to the downloader, each

having its own log-on code. The access levels allow

the operators read/write capabilities of the

customers’ account information. For a detailed

explanation of the access levels, see the

downloading software User Manual.

NOTES:

• Each time the control panel is accessed

successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent to

the central station, if Opening reports are

programmed.

• When the system is downloading, the keypad

displays “MODEM COMM.”

• After each download or save an automatic time

stamp is done to indicate the last download (or

save) and the operator ID number.

• A complete hard copy of each individual account

can be obtained by connecting a printer to the

computer. Refer to your computer Owner’s Manual

or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.

Unattended Download (For Burglary Use Only)

Unattended download allows the control panel to

communicate with the download computer without an

operator at the computer. This feature is useful on new

installations.

The installer can mount the control, attach a keypad

and phone line, and continue to wire the rest of the

installation while the system is automatically

downloaded.

If Compass has an account already created, and the

panel is defaulted; the installer enters Code #89, enters

the unattended phone number, account number,

primary phone number, and then triggers the

unattended call. The panel calls and connects to

Compass; then Compass does an upload, followed by a

download of the existing account data (if this option has

been selected at the station – otherwise Compass will

disconnect).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

7-2

If Compass does not have an account already created,

and the panel is defaulted; the installer enters Code

#89, enters the unattended phone number, account

number, primary phone number, and then triggers the

unattended call. The panel calls and connects to

Compass; then Compass does an upload, and

disconnects (if this option has been selected at the

station – otherwise Compass will download the default

account data). A new account “??????-FFFF” will be

created.

For unattended download to work, the Receiver Group

and Primary Phone number have to be entered into

Compass.

The following items must be programmed for

unattended download:

• The account number (field ✳32)

• Primary central station telephone number (field

✳33)

• The download telephone number (field ✳35)

• Unattended Mode (enable in field ✳54.)

NOTE: The default for field ✳54 is enabled (1).

Installer Unattended Program Mode

The Installer Unattended Program Mode allows the

installer to program fields ✳32, ✳33, and ✳35 without

entering the normal program mode.

In response to the displayed menu selection, press 0

(NO) or 1 (YES). Pressing 0 displays the next choice in

sequence.

To access this mode, enter Installer Code + [#] + [89]. The following prompt appears:

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Unattend. Phone

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the unattended phone number.

Unattend. Phone 1

Enter the telephone number of the download software modem.

Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = ✳

✳✳

✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the

✳ key to accept the phone number and exit.

Press the # key to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit the Installer Unattended Program Mode, or 0 to

continue to the next prompt.

Unattended Acct#

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the unattended account number.

Unattended Acct#

15-15-15-15

Enter a 3-or 4-digit (depending on report format) account number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires

a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used,

enter digits in the first 3 locations, and enter 00 in the last location.

Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.

Primary Phone

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the primary phone number.

Primary Phone 0

Enter the primary central station telephone number.

Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = ✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the

D key accept the phone number and exit.

Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to quit the Installer Unattended Program Mode. Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the first

menu prompt, “UNATTEND. PHONE”.

Trig. Unattended

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to initiate the unattended download at this time. Otherwise enter 0.

NOTE: The ADEMCO Compass Downloader must be in Unattended Mode.

An unattended download may be initiated by the installer or end user at any time by entering User Code + [#] + [1].

Section 7 – Downloading

7-3

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

At the protected premises, the control panel must be

connected to the existing telephone line (refer to the

SECTION 3: Installing the Control). No programming

of the panel is required before downloading to an initial

installation unless you are performing an unattended

download.

When establishing a connection between the computer

and the control panel, the following occurs:

Stage What Happens

1 The computer calls up the control panel.

(The phone number for each customer must

be entered into the customer’s account file

on the computer.)

2 The control panel answers the phone call at

the pre-programmed ring count and executes

a handshake with the computer.

3 The computer sends a request for callback to

the control, unless callback is not required.

4 The panel acknowledges the request and

hangs up. During the next few seconds, the

control processes the request, making sure

certain encrypted information received from

the computer matches its own memory.

5 Upon a successful match, the control panel

seizes the phone line and calls the computer

back, unless callback is not required. (The

phone number to which the computer’s

modem is connected must be programmed

into the control field ✳35.)

6 The computer answers, usually by the

second ring, and executes a handshake with

the panel.

7 The panel then sends other default

information to the computer. If this

information matches the computer’s

information, a successful link is established.

The system is now “on-line” with the

computer.

• Alarms and Trouble responses and reports

are disabled during actual uploading or

downloading sessions. If you are on-line,

but not actively uploading or downloading,

all alarms report immediately. All other

reports are delayed until you complete the

session.

• The keypads remain active when on-line

with a control, but are inactive during

actual uploading or downloading sessions.

• For IP/ECP downloadin

, all reports can be

transmitted while an up load/download/on-

line session is active.

To download a control without programming any

information, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter the Installer Code + [#] + [5]. The

panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5

and sets the Download Callback option to “1”

(callback not required).

2 From the computer, call the panel using the

downloader software set to “First

Communication” Mode.

The downloader establishes a session with no

callback. The panel information can then be

downloaded.

On-Line Control Functions

The following functions can be performed while on-line

with a control panel (see field *37):

• Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the

system

• Bypass a zone

• Force the system to accept a new program

download

• Shut down communication (dialer) functions (for

nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned

system)

• Shut down all security system functions (for

nonpayment for a leased system)

• Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents

takeover of your accounts)

• Leave a message for customer

NOTE: Messages sent to the control panel from the

downloader will be viewable at ALL partitions.

• Command the system to upload a copy of its

resident program to the office

• Read: arming status, AC power status, list of

faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 512 event log,

list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones

currently in trouble, and ECP equipment list

• Set the real-time clock

Scheduled Download (For Burglary Use

Only)

The VISTA-128FBPN can be programmed to

periodically and automatically call the downloader.

When this option is set up, the system will call the

downloader at a scheduled time. Once the connection is

established with the modem, the downloader controls

which functions are performed (download, arm, upload

event log, etc.).

It should be noted that Compass always

uploads before performing a download

session.

The programmable options for the scheduled download

are located in the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

7-4

Guide under the main menu prompt Scheduled Check-

in.

The options are as follows:

• Check-in interval (weekly, monthly quarterly,

yearly)

• Quarter of the year (if quarterly is selected)

• Month of the year (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly

is selected)

• Day of the month (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly

is selected)

• Day of the week (if weekly is selected)

• Time of day

Refer to the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming Guide

for sequence of the prompts.

Direct-Wire Downloading

The VISTA-128FBPN can be downloaded without using

a modem or telephone line by using a 4100SM Serial

Module and Compass Downloading Software. The

direct-wire downloading connection is to be temporary,

and is not part of the permanent installation. Direct-

wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer

during the installation process.

The connections between the control and

the 4100SM are different than those shown

in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See

Figure 7-1

for the correct connections. In

addition, in place of the green wire, referred to

in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY”

section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the

violet wire instead.

Connector J2 on the main PC board (see the Summary

of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this

manual) is intended to be interfaced to either a local

serial printer (see Event Log Connections in SECTION

3 Installing the Control) or a computer. Make

connections to a computer as shown below. Note that

the violet wire connection for a computer differs

from that used when connecting a serial printer.

NOTE: The 4100SM Serial Module must be removed

from the J2 Header at the completion of downloading.

Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections

Telco Handoff

Telco handoff is another method of getting on-line with the downloader. The installer or customer enters the User Code

+ [#] + [1], while on the phone line with the computer’s modem phone line. The customer will get cut-off and the panel

and download computer will establish a connection.

8-1

SECTION 8

Setting the Real-Time Clock

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This system provides a real-time clock, which must be

set in order for the system’s event log to keep track of

events by time and date. It must also be set in order to

execute scheduling programs (Time-Driven events).

Use a 6160/6160CR-2 alpha keypad to set the

real-time clock, or set the clock via the

downloader software. Only users with Installer

or Master authority level can set the clock.

Setting the Time and Date

To set the real time clock, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Installer or Master Code + [#] 63.

Typical display shows:

TIME/DATE –– THU

12:01 AM 01/01/09

The day of the week is automatically

calculated based on the date entered. Time

and date entries are made by simply entering

the appropriate hour, minute, month, day

and year.

Press [✳] to move the cursor to the right of

the display, to the next position.

Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the

display, to the previous position.

2 Enter the correct hour. Then press [✳] to

move to the “minutes” field.

3 Enter the correct minutes. Press [✳] to move

to the AM/PM position.

Step Action

4 Press any key 0-9 to change AM to PM, or PM

to AM. Press [✳] to move cursor to the

“month” field position.

5 Enter the correct month using a 2-digit entry.

Press [✳] to move cursor to the “day” field

position.

6 Enter the correct day using a 2-digit entry.

Press [✳] to move cursor to the “year” field

position.

7 Enter the correct year.

Press [✳] to continue.

8 The following display appears:

Broadcast Time?

1=YES 0=NO 0

Must be set to 0 (NO).

Press [✳] to exit the real-time clock edit

mode.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

8-2

9-1

SECTION 9

User Access Codes

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The VISTA-128FBPN system allows a total of 150

security access codes to be allocated. Each security

access code is identified by a user ID number.

Regardless of the number of partitions each code

has access to, it occupies only one user slot in the

system. If a particular code is not used in all

partitions, that user ID number cannot be used

again.

The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed

(partition-specific program field *29). The Quick Arm

feature allows the user to arm the system by pressing

the [#] key instead of the security code. The security

code must always be entered to disarm the system.

A user code other than the installer code must be

programmed in order for the Quick Arm feature to

function.

The system is shipped with the following defaults

for the user codes:

User 4-Digit Code Alpha Descriptor

User 1 (Installer) 5140 INSTLR

User 2 1234 MASTER

User Codes and Levels of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of

authority, which authorizes the user for certain system

functions. A user can have different levels of authority

within different partitions

Use the “View Capabilities” keypad function (User

Code + [✳] + [✳]) to view the partitions and authority

levels for which a particular user is authorized. These

levels are described below.

Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code

• Programmed in field *00 (default = 5-1-4-0).

Installer Open/Close reporting selected in field *39.

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,

bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if armed by

another code (or by Quick Arm).

• Can add, delete, or change all other codes, and can

select Open/Close reports for any user.

• Is the only code that can be used to enter program

mode. The Installer Code can be prevented from re-

entering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98.

• Must program at least one Master Code during

initial installation. Master Codes are codes

intended for use by the primary user(s) of the

system.

Level 1: Master Codes

• Can perform all normal system functions.

• Can be used to assign up to 126 lower-level codes,

which can be used by other users of the system.

• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.

• May change their own code.

• Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator

Codes. Each user’s code can be individually

eliminated or changed at any time.

• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as

that of the Master who is adding the new user.

Level 2: Manager Codes

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,

bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.

• May add, delete, or change other users of the

system below this level (Manager cannot assign

anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).

• May change their own code.

• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as

that of the Manager who is adding the new user.

Levels 3-5: Operator Codes

• Can operate a partition, but cannot add or modify

any user code (see table below).

Level Title Functions Permitted

3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass Burg Zones

4 Operator B Arm, Disarm

5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with

same code

• Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter

Code) cannot disarm the system unless the system

was armed with that code. This code is usually

assigned to persons who may need to arm and

disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a

babysitter needs to control the system only when

babysitting).

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

9-2

Level 6: Duress Codes

• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station

if the user is being forced to disarm (or arm) the

system under threat (system must be connected to

a central station).

• When the system’s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are

connected to another communication’s media

(Derived Channel/Communicator), note that duress

is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent

panic (whereas duress has its own unique report

when digitally communicated).

• Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can

be any code or codes desired.

Duress Reporting NOTE: A non-zero report

code for zone 992 (duress) must be

programmed, and partition-specific field *85

duress location enabled, to enable Duress

reporting.

• The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the

5th key depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key

depression (last digit of code). Duress reports are

not triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when

you perform a GOTO or view the capabilities of a

user.

General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes

The following rules apply to users when making modifications

within the system based on the user code authority levels:

• Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used

interchangeably when performing system functions within a

partition (a system armed with a user’s temporary code can

be disarmed with the Master Code or another user’s

temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code

described above.

• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME

or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned.

• A user (levels 0, 1 and 2 only) may only ADD users to a

LOWER authority level.

• A user may assign other users access to only those

partitions to which he himself has access.

• A user code can be DELETED or CHANGED only from

within the partition it was created in.

• User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user

numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a “00”

(e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user

understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered

as 4-digit numbers.

Open/Close Reporting Note: When a user is added,

the system prompts for Open/Close reporting capability

only if the installer is adding the new user. When a

Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user’s

Open/Close reporting is the same as that of the Master

or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close

reports are required to be selectable by the Master or

Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or

Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting

enabled, and one without.

Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled

if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close reporting, and

that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick

Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User 002 must

have authority and Open/Close must be enabled for all

partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not

desired, it is suggested that user 002 be assigned

authority level 5 in all partitions, and that the code be

kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system

unless armed by that user.

ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of

reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other

report format is used, only user numbers 001 –

015 can uniquely report to the central station.

Users 016 – 150 will report as User 015.

Multiple Partition Access

Each user is programmed for a primary (home)

partition. A user can also be given access to operate

one or more additional partitions. Within each

partition, each user may be programmed to have

different levels of authority. For example, User 003,

the VP of Engineering, could be assigned to work within

the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC

Manufacturing. Because he needs the full capabilities

in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1

authority.

He must also be able to gain access to the

manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency

basis. You can set this up easily by requesting that he

also be assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority

set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B).

The control automatically assigns him the same user

number within Partition 2.

EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS

Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8

User 3 User 3

Level 1 Level 4

Master Oper B

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in

Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2.

His user number is the same for both partitions. Note

that if a user number is already being used in a

partition, the system will automatically assign a new

user an unused number. Also notice that no access is

allowed for this user into Partitions 3 through 8.

Attempts to access these partitions would be denied

automatically.

Section 9 – User Access Codes

9-3

Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

During user code entry, normal key

depressions at other keypads in a partition are

ignored. However, panic key depression

causes an alarm and terminates user entry.

Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) +

new user’s code†Or Master or Manager Code, but the

code must be a higher level of authority than the code

being changed (e.g., a Manager Code can add an

Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or

another Manager Code). Keypad prompts for the

authority level for this user.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

User Number = 003

Enter Auth. Level

Enter the level number as follows:

1 = Master

2 = Manager

3 = Operator A

4 = Operator B

5 = Operator C

6 = Duress

Keypad then prompts for Open/Close reporting option for this user.

Open/Close Rep.?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not arming/disarming by this user will trigger

Opening and Closing reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a

user.

Group Bypassing?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to allow this user to perform group bypasses. Enter 0 (NO) this user will not be

able to perform group bypasses.

NOTE: In addition to enabling the user for group bypassing, the user must also have access to

the partition(s) containing the zones being bypassed and have global arming capability.

Access Group?

Enter 0-8

If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears. Enter the user’s access

group number (1-8) if this user should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access

group should be assigned.

RF Button ?

0=NO , 1=YES

Not Used.

Multi-Access ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to

have access to more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad

prompts for the Global Arm option for this user.

Global Arm ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one

partition via Global Arm prompts (described in the

VISTA-128FBPN User Guide

The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.

Part. 2 – SHOP ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed

partition number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in

sequence.

If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:

• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority Level prompt above).

• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see Open/Close prompt above).

• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.

When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which

access has been assigned, and will display the user number, authority level, open/close and

global arm options that were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted

access. For example:

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

9-4

PROMPT EXPLANATION

XMT USER DATA

1 = YES 0 = NO

If the user number is from 001-050 this appears. Answer YES (1) to have the system send the

user’s attributes to all the other control panels that are “linked” to this control. If you answer NO

(0), the system displays the following prompt on the next page.

INDV USER PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO

Answer YES (1) to link to another control panel and manually enter the user into partition(s) in

that control panel. If you answer NO (0), the system scrolls through each partition displaying a

summary of the user’s attributes in each partition (see next prompt).

Part. 1 A0* WHSE

User 003 Auth=3G.

Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for

this user in the displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the second line indicates

Open/Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The “T” indicates the

partition from which the user may be changed or deleted.

Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter Installer Code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + new user’s code

*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a

Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).

PROMPT EXPLANATION

User Number = 003

NEW USER?

The system detects that the user number is already assigned, and prompts if this is a new user.

Press 0 (NO).

The system then confirms that the change is allowed based on authorization level.

Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter your code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + your code again

*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a

Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).

PROMPT EXPLANATION

OK TO DELETE 003?

0=NO 1=YES

The system prompts to confirm that you want to delete this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

If you answered “yes,” that user’s code is removed from all partitions to which it was assigned,

and all authorization levels and other information about that user are deleted. Note that a user

can be deleted only by a user with a higher authority level. A user cannot self delete.

A user code can be deleted only from the partition through which it was entered. If an attempt is made to

delete from another partition, the message “User [XXX] Not Deleted” is displayed.

Exiting the User Edit Mode

Press either [T] or [#], or don’t press any key for 10 seconds.

10-1

SECTION 10

Testing the System

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Battery Test

When AC power is present, the VISTA-128FBPN runs a

brief battery test every 60 seconds to determine if there

is a battery connected, and runs an extended battery

test every 4 hours to check on the battery’s condition.

If the VISTA-128FBPN finds that the battery voltage is

low (less than approximately 11.5V), it initiates a

keypad “SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a rapid keypad

beeping sound. It also sends a Low Battery report to

the central station (if programmed). The keypad is

cleared by entering any security code + OFF, and a

Restore report is sent to the central station if the

situation has been corrected.

Dialer Test

The VISTA-128FBPN may be programmed to

automatically transmit test reports to a central station

at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per

9999 hours (field ✳27).

Commercial Fire Alarms and Commercial Burglary

requires the test report to be transmitted at least once

every 24 hours. The system can be programmed to send

the first report at any time of the day, or on any day of

the week (field ✳83).

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)

This test causes fire Notification Appliance Circuits to

be activated for the purpose of conducting a fire drill or

bell test. This test can only be activated by the installer

or master users from partition 1 keypads by entering

the corresponding security code + [#] + 69. The burglary

portion of the system must be disarmed.

Keypads display “FIRE DRILL ACTIVE” while the test

is active. The test is stopped by entering any user code

+ OFF.

The system continues to monitor all 24-hour type zones

(fire, panic, etc.) and ends the test if any of these zone

types produce an alarm condition.

This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as

determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)

This test causes the system to sound console beeps and

Notification Appliance Circuit dings in response to fire

zone faults (zone type 9, 16 and 17) for the purpose of

allowing proper zone operation to be checked without

triggering alarms. Note that the system will not be

operational as an alarm system (i.e., cannot sense

alarms) while this test is active. The test can only be

activated by the installer by entering the Installer’s

Code and pressing [#] + 68 while the burglary portion of

the system is disarmed.

This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as

determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

When testing non-latchin

devices, such as heat

detectors, be sure to keep the device faulted

until the system responds with the keypad beep

or siren sound. If the device is faulted only

momentarily, the s

stem ma

not respond to the

fault.

When this test is first activated, the system will display:

PROMPT EXPLANATION

USE BELL DING?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the fire Notification Appliance Circuits associated with each point sound for 3 seconds

when a point is faulted.

Enter 0 (NO) if only keypad sounders are desired.

The next prompt will be displayed.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

10-2

PROMPT EXPLANATION

AUTO-TEST DET?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system automatically test all polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16.

Other fire zones will have to be tested manually.

Enter 0 (NO) to test every point manually.

The next prompt will be displayed.

For true detector sensitivity tests, and for compliance with fire codes, you must enter 0 (NO) to this question.

LOG RESULTS?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system log each point as it is tested. A list of untested points will also be logged.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to log the results.

The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report format has been selected.

C.S. TRANSMIT?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the results of the test sent to the central station. This report will consist of a list of

points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to report the results. A Walk-Test Start and Walk-Test End report will be

sent in either case (if programmed).

When the Test Mode is activated, the system will sound

fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or any NAC having

a non-zero response type programmed in the #93 Menu

Mode) for 3 seconds. The system will also send a Start

of Walk-Test message to the central station, and will

light all keypad indicators (except the ARMED LED)

and display window segments to verify that they are

working properly. The keypads will then display Fire

Walk-Test in Progress and will sound a single beep

every 15 seconds while this test is active. Additionally,

in this test mode RF receiver sensitivity is reduced to

50% to ensure proper fire RF device mounting locations.

The system will build a list of all the fire zones

(response types 9, 16, 17, 18) that need to be tested.

These points will be scrolled on the display. For each

point, the keypad will display "UNTST XXX," where

XXX is the point number, followed by an alpha

descriptor for the point.

If the auto-test option has been selected, the control

panel will attempt to automatically test all of the

polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9

or 16. For points that must be manually tested, fault

and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn.

Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire

Notification Appliance Circuits to ding. The keypads

will display the zone number and the associated alpha

descriptor while the zone remains faulted. The system

automatically issues a smoke detector power reset

about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these

zones, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.

The system will automatically perform the

smoke detector reset on zones 1 and 2, if

programmed for fire, and on the auxiliary relay

and any other output device (relay) that is

programmed for smoke detector reset.

To end the test, enter any security code and press OFF.

An End of Walk-Test message will be sent to the central

station (if programmed). Note that the test will

automatically end if no faults are detected within a 1-

hour time period.

Burglary Walk-Test

This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in

response to faults on zones for the purpose of allowing

proper zone operation to be checked without triggering

alarms. This test can be activated by any user by

entering the corresponding security code and pressing

TEST while the burglary portion of the system is

disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a

weekly basis.

When this test is first entered, the system activates the

alarm output for 3 seconds. The system sends a Start of

Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypad

displays “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and sounds a

single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains

active.

Open and close each protected door and window in turn.

Each action should produce three beeps from the

keypad. Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen

for three beeps when the detector senses movement.

The keypad displays the zone number and alpha

descriptor while a door or window remains open or

while a detector remains activated. The system

automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector

Power Reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on

this zone, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.

To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF.

An End of Walk-Test message is sent to the central

station.

Section 10 – Testing the System

10-3

The system automatically exits the Test mode if there is no activity (no doors or windows are opened and

closed, no motion detectors are activated, etc.) for 60 minutes. The system beeps the keypad(s) twice every

15 seconds during the last 5 minutes as a warning that it is about to exit the Test mode and return to normal

operation.

Armed Burglary System Test

• Alarm messages are sent to the central

station during the armed tests. Notify the

central station that a test will be in progress.

• A display of “COMM FAILURE” indicates a

failure to communicate (no kissoff by the

receiver at the central station). If this occurs,

verify that the phone line is connected, the

correct report format is programmed, etc.

To perform an armed burglary test, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Notify the central station that a test of the

system is being performed.

2 Arm the system.

3 Fault one or more zones.

4 Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by

entering the code and pressing OFF.

NOTE: The system must be rearmed after

each code + off sequence.

5 Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the

assigned delay times.

Step Action

6 Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if

programmed, by pressing the panic key pairs

(✳ and #, 1 and ✳, and/or 3 and #).

The word ALARM and a descriptor “999” are

displayed for ✳ and #. If [1] and [✳] are

pressed, “995” is displayed; if [3] and [#] are

pressed, “996” is displayed.

7 If the system has been programmed for

audible emergency, the keypad emits a loud,

steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by

entering the security code and pressing OFF.

If the system has been programmed for silent

panic, there are no audible alarms or

displays. A report is sent to the central

station, however.

8 Notify the central station that all tests are

finished, and verify results with them.

Testing Wireless Transmitters

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode

Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that

transmitters have all been properly programmed.

If a transmitter does not have its serial number

“enrolled,” it will not turn off its zone number.

To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, proceed as

follows:

Step Action

1 Enter Installer Code + [#] + [3]. The

keypad displays all zone numbers of wireless

units programmed into the system.

2 Fault each wireless zone, causing each device

to transmit.

As the system receives a signal from each of

the transmitters, the zone number of that

transmitter disappears from the display.

3 Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the

Sniffer Mode.

Go/No Go Test Mode (For Burglary Use Only)

This mode assists in determining good mounting

locations, and that the RF transmission has sufficient

signal amplitude margin for the installed system.

• All partitions with wireless transmitters must

be placed in the test mode for RF receiver

sensitivity reduction (50%). Otherwise, the

RF receiver remains at full strength.

• Make sure that all partitions are disarmed

for this test.

To enter the Go/No Go Test Mode, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Enter Installer Code + [5].

2 Fault each wireless transmitter, causing each

device to transmit.

The keypad will beep three times if the signal

is received.

3 If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move

the transmitter to another location. Usually

a few inches in either direction is all that is

required.

4 Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the

Go/No Go Test Mode.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

10-4

Trouble Conditions

Supervisory Messages

Display Description

SUPV +

Zone

Number

This indicates that a fire supervisory

condition exists on the zone number

displayed. This means that the operation

of the fire alarm system may be

compromised.

Check or Trouble Messages

Display Description

CHECK or

TRBL

(as per field

3✳00)

This indicates that a problem exists on

the zone number displayed. Zone trouble

may be caused by one of the following

conditions:

• A hardwired fire zone is open

(broken wire).

• A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is

faulted.

• A polling loop zone is not seen by

the control panel.

• A polling loop zone has been

tampered (cover removed on a

4190SN).

• A wireless zone has not checked in

during the time programmed in field

1✳31.

• A 5800 Series transmitter has been

tampered (cover removed).

CHECK 6XX

XX = 01-32

This indicates a trouble on a 4204CF

Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit

(corresponding relay number 01-32).

CHECK 8XX

XX = 00-30

This indicates a trouble on a peripheral

device (connected to the panel’s keypad

terminals) of the corresponding device

address (00-30).

CHECK 9XX

XX = 70-77,

88,90,97

This indicates that a system trouble

exists (RF receiver, Notification

Appliance Circuit, etc.).

If the problem has been corrected, enter an

OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice

to clear the display.

Power Failure

Display Description

AC LOSS

POWER

LED is off

This indicates that the system is

operating on battery power only. Check

to see that the circuit breaker for the

branch circuit that your system’s

transformer is wired to has not been

accidentally turned off. Instruct the

user to call a service representative

immediately if AC power cannot be

restored.

Other System Messages

Display Description

COMM

FAILURE

Indicates a failure occurred in the

telephone communication portion of your

system.

LO BAT Indicates a low-battery condition exists in

the wireless transmitter displayed.

Pressing any key silences the audible

warning sound.

SYSTEM

LO BAT

This indicates that a low-battery condition

exists with the system’s backup battery.

HSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a high

sensitivity level, which may cause a false

alarm. The detector should be cleaned or

replaced.

LSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a low

sensitivity level. The detector may not

detect a smoke condition. The detector

should be cleaned or replaced.

RCVR

SETUP

ERROR

Indicates the system has more wireless

zones programmed than the RF receiver

can support. If this is not corrected, none

of the zones in the system will be

protected. If additional wireless zones are

desired, use an appropriate receiver.

MODEM

COMM

This indicates that the control is on-line

with a remote computer.

System Off-Normal Report

If programmed, an Off-Normal report is generated

instead of the periodic test report if any of the following

conditions are present at the time of the report:

• Fire trouble on any zone (zone types 9, 16, 17, 18)

• Fire supervisory present (zone type 18)

• Unrestored fire alarm on any zone

• Bypass of any fire zone

• A fault for any supervised fire Notification

Appliance Circuit

• Bypass/disable of any supervised fire Notification

Appliance Circuit

• Telco fault of either dialer line

• Bypass/disable of either dialer line

• Earth ground fault

• Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone

• Fault on LORRA “XMIT OK” signal (if enabled)

• LORRA trigger bypassed

• AC failure

• Low system battery

• Keypad supervision fault

The Off-Normal report is sent as follows:

• Contact ID: Code 608

• High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used

(channel 9=6)

• Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group

#4 report codes

Section 10 – Testing The System

10-5

To the Installer

Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually)

by the installer and frequent testing by the user are

vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm

system.

The installer should assume the responsibility of

developing and offering a regular maintenance program

to the user as well as acquainting the user with the

proper operation and limitations of the alarm system

and its component parts. Recommendations must be

included for a specific program of frequent testing (at

least weekly) to ensure the system’s proper operation at

all times.

Turning the System over to the User

Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by

going over each of its functions, as well as the User

Guide supplied.

In particular, explain the operation of each zone

(entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the

user understands how to operate any emergency

feature(s) programmed into the system.

Contacting Technical Support

PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure

you:

• READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!

• Check all wiring connections.

• Determine that the power supply and/or backup

battery are supplying proper voltages.

• Verify your programming information where

applicable.

• Verify that all keypads and devices are addressed

properly.

• Note the proper model number of this product, and

the version level (if known) along with any

documentation that came with the product.

• Note your Honeywell customer number and/or

company name.

Having this information handy will make it easier for

us to serve you quickly and effectively.

Technical Support:..................................................... 1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. EST)

World Wide Web Address: ................................ http://www.honeywell.com/security

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

10-6

A-1

APPENDIX A

Regulatory Agency Statements

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

UL Installation Requirements

UL This system may be used in installations that require UL2050 compliance.

The following requirements apply to UL commercial burglary installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.

4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a

tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied with VISTA-128FBPN). Wire the selected device to any

EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour

audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned

systems.

UL864/NFPA Local Fire

Configure at least one Notification Appliance Circuit for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators

to it.

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire

1. Size the backup battery for 24-hour standby time.

2. For central station service, you may use the 7845i-ent communications device alone, the main dialer with

a communications device, or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module. For remote

station service, you must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module.

3. When the main dialer is used, enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a telephone line. Assign a 24-hour

trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The control panel will

activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault.

4. When the backup dialer is used, install it on the control panel’s PCB shield as indicated in the Summary

of Connections diagram. Enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a separate telephone line. Assign a 24-

hour trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision.

5. When the dialer is used, program it to send fire alarm, fire supervisory (if used), trouble, AC loss, low

battery, normal dialer test, and off-normal dialer test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" maximum

so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.

6. If a secondary number is programmed, set the maximum number of dialer retries to 3, 4, or 5 in field

3*21.

Commercial Burglary Requirements

The following requirements apply to all UL Commercial Burglary installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.

4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by

installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied). See additional requirements below.

UL This system may be used in installations that require UL2050 compliance.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

A-2

UL609 Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault

1. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). If 4190SN V-Plex devices are used, set field

*24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.

2. Attach a Listed door tamper switch to protect the cabinet door. Wire the selected device to Zone 6.

Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response.

The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems. Enable field 3*17 so that

the system responds to a ground fault on that zone in accordance with the zone type rather than a

ground fault response.

2A. For safe and vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) that is Listed for protection of sheet

metal enclosures, as well as an additional Listed tamper switch, must be installed on the cabinet

backbox to protect the cabinet from being removed from the wall. These devices must also be

connected to zone 6.

(Also see Mounting the Cabinet in SECTION 3: Installing the Control).

3. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.

4. All unused knockouts must be plugged (use the supplied disc plugs and carriage bolts).

5. Must be used with a Listed burglar alarm sounding device/housing. Depending on the application, a

compatible Listed sounding device enclosure may also be required.

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.

For Systems without Line Security:

• You may use the control panel’s main dialer alone, or the 7845i-ent, 7845-GSM or 7845i-GSM

Communications Device alone.

• When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and Communicator Test

reports. Field *27 must be set to "0024" (or less) so that test reports are sent at least once every 24

hours.

For Systems with Line Security:

• The dialer must be used in conjunction with a 7845i-ent Communications Device.

UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL365 local installations stated above, and follow the additional guidelines

below.

For Systems without Line Security:

• You must use the control panel’s main dialer in conjunction with a 5140DLM, 7845i-ent, 7845i-GSM, or

7845GSM Communications Device.

• Program the dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low Battery reports.

For Systems with Line Security:

Follow the instructions for Systems without Line Security, but note that only a 7845i-ent may be used as the

secondary Communications Device.

Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements

A-3

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) STATEMENTS

The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or User's

Manual. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CLASS B DIGITAL DEVICE STATEMENT

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) STATEMENTS

This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS

In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X

(CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the

system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone

lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the

control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a

problem on the line, notify the telephone company that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user

may not under any circumstances (in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be

returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs.

FCC PART 68 NOTICE

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains,

among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If

requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.

This equipment uses the following jacks:

An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on

the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the

sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as

determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that

temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will

notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you

believe necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the

operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make

the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If

the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the

equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer.

Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.

This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject

to state tariffs.

This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.

When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the

call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

A-4

CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003

NOTICE

The Industry Canada Label identifies certified

equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets telecommunications network

protective, operational and safety requirements as

prescribed in the appropriate Terminal

Equipment Technical Requirements document(s).

The Department does not guarantee the

equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should

ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the

facilities of the local telecommunications

company. The equipment must also be installed

using an acceptable method of connection. The

customer should be aware that compliance with

the above conditions may not prevent degradation

of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be

coordinated by a representative designated by the

supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the

user to this equipment, or equipment

malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications

company to request the user to disconnect the

equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that

the electrical ground connections of the power

utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic

water pipe system, if present, are connected

together. This precaution may be particularly

important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such

connections themselves, but should contact an

appropriate electric inspection authority, or

electrician, as appropriate.

NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number

(REN) assigned to each terminal device provides

an indication of the maximum number of

terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone

interface. The termination on an interface may

consist of any combination of devices subject only

to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer

Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not

exceed 5.

AVIS

L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le

matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le

matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,

d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de

télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les

documents concernant les exigences techniques

relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère

n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera

à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur. Avant d’installer

ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est

permis de le raccorder aux installations de

l’enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le

matériel doit également être installé en suivant

une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L’abonné

ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la

conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus

n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans

certaines situations.

Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent

être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par

le fournisseur. L’entreprise de

télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur

da débrancher un appareil à la suite de

réparations ou de modifications effectuées par

l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais

fonctionnement.

Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit

s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la

source d’energie électrique, de lignes

téléphoniques et des canalisations d’eau

métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.

Cette précaution est particulièrement importante

dans les régions rurales.

Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter

de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir

racours à un service d’inspection des installations

électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.

AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie

(IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique

le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être

raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d’une

interface téléphonique peut consister en une

combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule

condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de

la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.

B-1

APPENDIX B

Summary of System Commands

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

User Code

Commands

Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User’s Code

Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User’s Code

Delete a User’s Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number to Be Deleted + Your Code

Again

View User Capability = User’s Code + [✳] + [✳]

Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] + 63

Programming

Commands

Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.

Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.

Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.

Enter Interactive Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000 + [#] + 93

Exit Program Mode = ✳99 or ✳98.

Event Logging

Commands

Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)

Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)

Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)

Wireless System

Commands

House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)

Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)

Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)

Partition GOTO User Code + [✳] + Partition Number 0-8.

GOTO Home Partition User Code + [✳] + 0.

Panics [✳] + 1 or A Key (Zone 995).

[✳] + [#] or B Key (Zone 999).

[#] + 3 or C Key (Zone 996).

View Downloaded Messages Press 0 for 5 Seconds.

Display All Zone Descriptors Press [✳] for 5 Seconds.

Additional

Commands

Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds.

Output Device

Control Commands

Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.

Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.

Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.

Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.

Randomize Output Devices = User Code + [#] + 41

Randomize Output Devices Programmed with Activation Times Between 6 PM and 5

AM = User Code + [#] + 42.

De-activate Randomization = Enter the sequence used to activate randomization.

Test Mode

Commands

Burglary Walk-Test = User Code + 5.

Fire Drill Test = User Code + [#] + 69 (Installer or Master Only).

One-Man Fire Walk-Test = User Code + [#] + 68 (Installer Only)

Scheduling

Commands

Installer-Programmed Schedule Events = Installer Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master

Only).

Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).

Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).

End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

B-2

Relay Control

Commands

Activate Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.

C-1

APPENDIX C

Specifications

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

VISTA-128FBPN CONTROL

Physical: 18"H X 14-1/2"W X 4.3"D

Electrical:

Primary Power: From ADEMCO No. 1451 Transformer with enclosure; rated 18VAC, 72VA.

Backup Battery: 12VDC, 12AH min to 34.4AH max. lead acid battery (gel type).

Alarm Power: 12VDC, 1.7A max. for each Notification Appliance Circuit.

Aux. Standby Pwr 12VDC, 1A max.

Total Power Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2.3A.

Standby Time: 24 hours with 1A aux standby load using 34.4AH battery.

Fusing: Battery input, auxiliary and Notification Appliance Circuits are protected using PTC

circuit protectors. All outputs are power limited.

Main Dialer

Line Seize: Double Pole

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

FCC Registration No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E

TLM Threshold Good line when tip-to-ring voltage greater than approximately 25V (13 when blue

jumper cut) or when handset current greater than approximately 10mA. Bad line

when both voltage and current below these levels.

Formats: ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO

Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed

Compatible Receivers

7810iR-ent

MX8000

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE

Physical: 2.75”H X 4”W X 1”D

Mounts on VISTA-128FBP main PC board shield using standoffs supplied.

Connects to VISTA-128FBP main PC board J3 header using ribbon cable supplied.

FCC Registration: AC3-USA-62628-MO-N

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

C-2

D-1

APPENDIX D

Contact ID Codes

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES

Code Definition

110 Fire Alarm

111 Smoke Alarm

113 Waterflow Alarm

121 Duress

122 Silent Panic

123 Audible Panic

124 Duress Access Grant

125 Duress Egress Grant

131 Perimeter Burglary

132 Interior Burglary

133 24-Hour Burglary

134 Entry/Exit Burglary

135 Day/Night Burglary

140 ACS Zone Alarm

142 Polling Loop Short Alarm

150 24-Hour Auxiliary

162 CO Alarm

200 Fire Supervisory

301 AC Loss

302 Low System Battery

305 System Reset

306 Program Tamper

308 System Shutdown

309 Battery Test Fail

310 Ground Fault

313 System Engineer Reset

314 Primary Power Supply Fail

320 ACS Relay Supervision

321 Bell 1 Trouble

322 Bell 2 Trouble

332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble

333 Expansion Module Failure

338 ACS Module Low Battery

339 ACS Module Reset

342 ACS Module AC Loss

343 ACS Module Self-Test Fail

344 RF Jam

351 Main Dialer Trouble

352 Backup Dialer Trouble

354 Communication Fail

373 Fire Loop Trouble

374 Exit Error by Zone

378 Cross Zone Trouble

Code Definition

380 Trouble (global)

381 Loss of Supervision (RF)

382 Loss of V-Plex Supervision

383 V-Plex Sensor Tamper

384 RF Transmitter Low Battery

385 High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

386 Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

389 Detector Self-Test Failed

401 O/C by User

403 Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm

406 Cancel by User

407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)

408 Quick Arm

409 Keyswitch O/C

411 Callback Requested

421 Access Denied

422 Access Granted

423 Door Force Open

424 Egress Denied

425 Egress Granted

426 Door Prop Open

427 Access Point DSM Trouble

428 Access Point RTE Trouble

429 ACS Program Entry

430 ACS Program Exit

431 ACS Threat Change

432 Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail

433 Access Point RTE Shunt

434 Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt

441 Armed STAY

451 Early Open/Close

452 Late Open/Close

453 Fail to Open

454 Fail to Close

455 Auto-Arm Fail

459 Recent Close

501 ACS Reader Disable

520 ACS Relay Disable

521 Bell 1 Bypass

522 Bell 2 Bypass

524 Auxiliary Relay Bypass

551 Main/Backup Dialer Bypass

570 Bypass

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

D-2

Code Definition

576 ACS Zone Shunt

577 ACS Point Bypass

579 Vent Zone Bypass

602 Communicator Test

604 Fire Test

606 Listen-In to Follow

607 Burglary Walk-Test

608 Off-Normal

611 Fire Walk-Test – Point Tested

Code Definition

612 Fire Walk-Test – Point Not Tested

621 Event Log Reset

625 Time/Date Reset

627 Program Entry

628 Program Exit

631 Exception Schedule Change

632 Access Schedule Change

912 Fire Alarm Silence

Event Log Alpha Descriptors

Alpha Event Description

FIRE Fire Alarm

DURESS Duress Alarm

PANIC Silent or Audible Panic Alarm

BURGLARY Burglary Alarm

EXP SHRT Polling Loop Short

RF EXPND Expander Module Failure

AUXILIARY Non-burglary Alarm

TROUBLE Trouble

AC LOSS AC Loss

LOW BATTERY System Low Battery

SYSTEM RESET System Reset

PROG CHANGE Program Change

BATTERY FAIL System Battery Failure

RF SUPR RF Supervision

V-PLEX SUPR V-Plex Supervision

RF LBAT RF Low Battery

EXP TRBL Expander Module Trouble

RF TRBL RF Trouble

TAMPER Tamper

FIRE TRB Fire Trouble

FAIL TO COMM Failure to Communicate

BELL TROUBLE Bell Trouble

DISARMED Disarmed

DISARMED-REM Disarmed Remotely

DISARMED-KEY Disarmed Via RF Key

DISARM-AUTO Auto-Disarm

CALL BACK Callback Requested

CANCEL Cancel

DISRMD-EARLY Disarmed Early

DISRMD-LATE Disarmed Late

MISSED DISRM Missed Disarm

SKED CHANGE Schedule Change

ACC SKED CHG Access Control Schedule Change

ARM FAILED Failed to Arm

DIALER SHUT Dialer Shutdown

Alpha Event Description

SYSTEM SHUT System Shutdown

BYPASS Bypass

SELF TEST Self-test

TEST ENTRY Manual Test Entry

TEST EXIT Manual Test Exit

LOG OVERFLOW Dialer Queue Overflow

LOG CLEARED Dialer Queue Cleared

TIME SET Time Set

TIME ERROR Time Error

PROGRM ENTRY Program Entry

PROGRAM EXIT Program Exit

Uxxx ADD BY User XXX Added BY

Uxxx DEL BY User XXX Deleted BY

Uxxx CHG BY User XXX Changed BY

PRINTER FAIL Event Log Printer Failure

PAGER FAILED Pager Failure

TESTED Zone Tested

UNTESTED Zone Untested

FAILED Zone Test Failed

RLY TRBL Relay Trouble

EXP TMPR Expansion Module Tamper

VENT BYPASS Vent Zone Bypass

RF JAM RF Jam Detected

JAM RSTR RF Jam Restore

FIRE RST Fire Alarm Restore

DURE RST Duress Alarm Restore

PNC RST Panic Alarm Restore

BURG RST Burglary Alarm Restore

EXP RST Expansion Module Restore

RF RST RF Restore

AUX RST Auxiliary Restore

MED RST Medical Restore

TRBL RST Trouble Restore

AC RESTORE AC Restore

LOW BATT RST System Low Battery Restore

Appendix D – Contact ID Codes

D-3

Alpha Event Description

PROG CHANGE Program Change

BAT TST FAIL Battery Test Failure

V-PLEX RST V-Plex Restore

RFLB RST RF Low Battery Restore

EXP RST Expansion Module Failure Restore

TMPR RST Tamper Restore

FRTR RST Fire Trouble Restore

COMM RESTORE Communication Restore

RLY RST ECP Relay Trouble Restore

ARMED Armed

ARMED-STAY Armed Stay

ARMED-REM Armed Remotely

ARMED-QUICK Quick Armed

ARMED-KEY Armed Via RF Key

ARMED-AUTO Auto-Armed

PARTIAL ARM Partial Armed

ARMED-EARLY Armed Early

ARMED-LATE Armed Late

MISSED ARM Missed Arm

DIALER RST Dialer Restore (Shutdown)

SYSTEM RST System Restore (Shutdown)

BYP RST Bypass Restore

TEST EXIT Test Mode Exit

PRINTER RSTR Printer Restore

PAGER RSTR Pager Restore

BELL RESTORE Bell Restore

EXIT ERR Exit Error

RECENT ARM Recent Arm

VENT BYP RST Vent Zone Bypass Restore

Access Control Events

ACS MOD Access Control Module Failure

ACS PNT Access Point Failure

DSM SHNT Door Status Monitor Shunt

DUR ACCS Duress Access Grant

NO ENTRY Access Denied

DR OPEN Door Propped Open

DR FORCE Door Forced Open

ENTERED Access Granted

NO EXIT Egress Denied

ACPT BYP Access Point Bypass

RTE SHNT Request to Exit Shunt

EXITED Egress Granted

ACLO MOD AC Loss at Module

LBAT MOD Low Battery at Module

COMM MOD Comm Failure from MLB to Module

RES MOD Access Control Module Reset

ACPT RLY Access Point Relay Supervision Fail

SELF MOD Module Self-Test Failure

Access Control Events

ACZN CHG Access Control Zone Change

ACS PROG Access Control Program Entry

ACS PRGX Access Control Program Exit

THRT CHG Access Control Threat Change

SYS SHUT System Shutdown

SYS RST System Engineer Reset

ZN SHUNT Access Control Zone Shunt

ZN ALARM Access Control Zone Alarm

RDR DISA Access Control Reader Disable

RLY DISA Access Control Relay/Trigger Disable

RTE TRBL Request to Exit Point Trouble

DSM TRBL Door Status Monitor Point Trouble

DUR EXIT Duress Egress Grant

BGN ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode Start

MOD RST `/Access Control Module Restore

ACPT RST Access Point Restore

ACRST MOD AC Loss at Module Restore

LBAT RST Low Battery at Module Restore

COMM RST Comm Fail MLB to Module Restore

RLY RST Access Point Relay Supervision Rest

SELF RST Self-Test at Module Restore

ACPT UNB Access Point Unbypass

DSM UNSH Door Status Monitor Unshunt

RTE UNSH Request to Exit Point Unshunt

DRFO RST Door Forced Open Restore

DRPO RST Door Propped Open Restore

DSM RST Door Status Monitor Trouble Restore

RTE RST Request to Exit Point Trouble Rest

RLY ENAB Access Control Relay/Trigger Enable

RDR ENAB Access Control Reader Enable

ZNAL RST Access Control Zone Restore

ZN UNSHT Access Control Zone Unshunt

SYSHTRST System Shutdown Restore

END ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode End

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

D-4

Index-1

Index

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

#93 Menu Mode Programming .......................... 4-2

#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands...... 4-4

12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format....................... 5-11

1451 Transformer................................................ C-1

24_Hour Trouble Type 19.................................... 4-7

24-Hour Audible Alarm Type 07 ......................... 4-6

24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08........................4-6

24-Hour Silent Alarm Type 06.............................4-6

2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors........... 3-13

2-Wire Smoke Detectors .................................. 3-11

4100SM Serial Module......................................... 7-4

4101SN Relay Modules .................................... 3-23

4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules .................... 3-22

4297 Polling Loop Extender ............................. 3-17

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset ........................... 3-8

4-Wire Smoke Detectors .................................. 3-12

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE ..............C-1

5800 Series Transmitters ................................. 3-20

5881ENHC........................................................... 3-18

AC 60Hz or 50Hz ............................................... 5-11

AC Loss Keypad Sounding ............................... 5-2

Access Group ........................................................9-3

Access Control Commands............................... 6-8

Access Control Dialer Enables ....................... 5-10

ACCESS GRP PGM...............................................4-3

ACCESS POINT PGM............................................4-3

Access Point Type 27..........................................4-7

Access Schedules

..................................................

6-5

Action Code...........................................................6-8

Action Specifier ....................................................6-8

Activation Time ...................................................... 6-8

Adding a User Code............................................ 9-3

Addressing the Keypads...................................... 3-4

ADEMCO 4+2 Express....................................... 3-10

ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS..................................... C-1

ADEMCO 685 receiver .......................................3-10

ADEMCO CONTACT ID....................................... C-1

ADEMCO HIGH SPEED....................................... C-1

ADEMCO Low Speed .........................................3-10

ADEMCO LOW SPEED ....................................... C-1

Affects Lobby ................................................2-2, 5-8

Agency Statements.............................................A-1

Alarm Activation ................................................. 3-8

Alarm Indicating Devices .............................. 3-5, 3-7

Alarm Output Supervision ................................. 3-5

Alarm Power ........................................................ C-1

Alarm Restore Report Timing............................ 5-7

Allow Disarm Outside Window if Alarm Occurs 5-

Allow Disarming Only During Arm/Disarm

Windows......................................................... 5-13

ALPHA PROG........................................................ 4-3

Antenna Fault ..................................................... 3-26

Arm/Disarm Commands ..................................... 6-8

Arm-Away Type 21...............................................4-7

Arms Lobby ...................................................2-2, 5-8

Arm-STAY Type 20...............................................4-7

Auto Arming ........................................................ 6-1

Auto Disarming ................................................... 6-1

Auto-Arm Delay.......................................... 5-12, 6-1

Auto-Arm Warning .............................................. 6-1

Auto-Arm Warning Period................................ 5-12

Auto-Disarm Delay............................................ 5-12

Aux. Standby Pwr ............................................... C-1

Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load ....................... 3-28

Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load ....................... 3-29

Auxiliary Relay Connections ............................. 3-8

Backup Battery.................................................... C-1

Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet ....... 3-30

Battery Saver....................................................... 3-8

Battery Selection Table .................................... 3-30

Battery Test ....................................................... 10-1

Bell 1 Output Current Load ...............................3-29

Bell 2 Output Current Load ...............................3-29

Bell Output Supervision ..................................... 3-5

Burglary Alarm Communicator Delay............... 5-7

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

Index-2

Burglary Trigger for Response Type 8 ............. 5-3

Burglary Walk Test ........................................... 10-2

Button RF ............................................................3-21

Bypass Commands ............................................ 6-8

Call Waiting Defeat ........................................... 5-10

Callback ................................................................ 7-3

Callback Requested............................................. 7-1

CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS............ A-4

Cancel Verify ....................................................... 5-8

Changing a User Code ....................................... 9-4

Check Messages............................................... 10-4

Checksum Verification ....................................... 5-5

CO Detector Alarm Type 14 ................................ 4-7

COMM FAILURE................................................. 10-4

Commercial Burglary Requirements ................ A-1

Commercial Fire Guidelines .............................. 3-2

Common Lobby .................................................. 2-1

Communication Defaults ................................... 4-5

Communicator Central Station #1 Category

Enable .............................................................. 5-6

Communicator Central Station #2 Category

Enable .............................................................. 5-6

Communicator ECP ............................................ 4-9

Communicator Split Reporting Selection ...... 5-10

Communicators Connected to ECP................ 3-25

Compass Downloading Software....................... 7-4

COMPASS downloading software ..................... 7-1

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors.............. 3-11

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.............. 3-12

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters ............ 3-21

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices .............. 3-5

Compatible Glass Break Detectors................. 3-13

Confirmation of Arming Ding ............................ 5-2

Console Input (CS) Type 09................................ 4-8

Contact ID............................................................. 1-2

Contact ID Event Codes .....................................D-1

Contacting Technical Support ........................ 10-5

Control Relay .................................................... 5-12

Control Unit Power Supply Load .................... 3-28

Conventions Used in This Manual .................vii, ix

Cross Zoning Pair Four...................................... 5-9

Cross Zoning Pair One....................................... 5-9

Cross Zoning Pair Three.................................... 5-9

Cross Zoning Pair Two ...................................... 5-9

Cross-Zoning ...................................................... 5-8

CUSTOM INDEX ....................................................4-3

Data Encryption ................................................... 7-1

Data Field Descriptions...................................... 5-1

Data Field Programming Mode.......................... 4-1

Daylight Saving Time Start/End Month .......... 5-12

Daylight Saving Time Start/End Weekend ..... 5-12

Deleting a User Code.......................................... 9-4

DEVICE PROG...................................................... 4-3

Dial Tone Detection ............................................ 5-4

Dial Tone Pause .................................................. 5-4

Dialer Operation ................................................ 3-11

Dialer Test.......................................................... 10-1

DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR ................................ C-1

DIP Switch Loop (DP) Type 07............................4-8

Direct-Wire Downloading ................................... 7-4

Disable Download Callback ............................. 5-11

Disarm Delay ....................................................... 6-1

Disarm Type 22 ....................................................4-7

Display Burglary , Panic and CO Alarms for

Other Partitions ............................................. 5-13

Display Fire Alarms of Other Partitions ......... 5-13

Display Troubles of Other Partitions .............. 5-13

Download Command Enables ........................... 5-4

Download ID Number ......................................... 5-4

Download Phone Number .................................. 5-4

Downloading ....................................................... 7-1

Downloading Access Security .......................... 7-1

Downloading Requirements .............................. 7-1

Dual Reporting .................................................... 5-5

Duress Codes Level 6 ........................................ 9-2

Duress Reporting.................................................9-2

Dynamic Signaling Delay ...........................3-25, 5-6

Dynamic Signaling Priority ........................3-25, 5-6

Early Power Detect ............................................ 3-26

Earth Ground..................................................... 3-27

Enable 5800 RF Button Force Arm.................. 5-11

Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm ................ 5-11

Enable Dialer Reports for Panics & Duress ..... 5-7

Enable GOTO for this Partition........................ 5-13

Enable J2 Triggers for Partition ...................... 5-13

Enable Open/Close Report for Installer Code.. 5-4

Enable Open/Close report for Keyswitch......... 5-4

Enable Random Timers For Partitions 1-8 ....... 5-1

Entering Programming Mode ............................ 4-1

Entry Delay #2 ..................................................... 5-2

Entry Warning ..................................................... 5-7

Entry/Exit #1 Type 01...........................................4-6

Entry/Exit #2 Type 02...........................................4-6

European Date Format ..................................... 5-11

Event Log........................................................... 3-26

Event Log Descriptors .......................................D-2

Event Log Printer On-Line Mode..................... 5-11

Event Log Types ............................................... 5-11

Event Logging Commands ................................B-1

EVENT/ACTION PGM ........................................... 4-3

Exception Reports .............................................. 6-2

Exit Delay #1........................................................ 5-2

Exit Delay #2........................................................ 5-2

Exit Delay Sounding ......................................... 5-10

Exit Error...............................................................1-2

Index

Index-3

Exit Error Logic Enable...................................... 5-8

Exiting the User Edit Mode ................................ 9-4

EXPERT MODE......................................................4-3

Extend Closing Window..................................... 6-1

Extended Delay for Zone Types 17 & 18 ........ 5-14

External Sounders .............................................. 3-4

FCC PART 68 NOTICE ........................................A-3

FCC REGISTRATION NO.................................... C-1

Fire Drill Test..................................................... 10-1

Fire Supervisory Type 18 ....................................4-7

Fire Waterflow Type 17 .......................................4-7

Fire With Verification Type 16 ............................ 4-7

First Communication........................................... 7-3

First Test Report Time........................................ 5-7

Force Arm............................................................ 6-1

Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm ..................... 5-12

Frwd. Power Loss .............................................. 3-26

Fusing .................................................................. C-1

General Description............................................ 1-1

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel............... 7-3

Global Arm ?...........................................................9-3

Go/No Go Test Mode ........................................ 10-3

Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones ........ 1-1

Hardwired (HW) Type 01 ..................................... 4-8

Holiday Schedule................................................ 6-3

Holiday Schedule Programming ....................... 6-7

Holiday schedules...................................................6-4

Holiday Schedules.............................................. 6-6

Honeywell 4146 .................................................. 3-23

Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper........................ 5-3

Installer (User 1) Code Level 0 .......................... 9-1

Installer Code ...................................................... 5-1

Installer Unattended Program Mode................. 7-2

Installing The Control......................................... 3-1

Installing the Control's Circuit Board............... 3-3

Installing V-Plex Devices ................................. 3-15

Intelligent Test Report........................................ 5-3

Interior w/Delay Type 10 ..................................... 4-7

Interior, Follower Type 04 ...................................4-6

Keypad Panic Enables ....................................... 5-2

Keypads............................................................... 2-1

Keyswitch .......................................................... 3-23

Keyswitch Assignment ...................................... 5-2

Keyswitch Tamper ............................................ 3-24

Limitation of Access........................................... 6-2

Limitation of Access Schedules...................... 6-11

Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming 6-

Line Security .......................................................A-2

LINE SEIZE .......................................................... C-1

List of Figures ....................................................... vi

LO BAT................................................................ 10-4

Lobby Partition.................................................... 5-8

Log 1st Main Signal ........................................... 5-12

Low Speed Format (Primary)............................. 5-5

Low Speed Format (Secondary)........................ 5-5

LRR Battery ........................................................3-26

LRR CRC is bad .................................................3-26

LRR reporting options.......................................3-25

Main Logic Board Supervision Type 28 ............4-7

Manager Codes Level 2...................................... 9-1

Master Codes Level 1 ......................................... 9-1

Master Keypad .................................................... 2-3

Mercantile Premises Listing .............................. 3-1

Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing ..................... 3-2

MODEM COMM............................................ 7-1, 10-4

modems ................................................................7-1

Momentary Exit Type 29......................................4-7

Mounting The Control Cabinet .......................... 3-1

Multi-Access ?........................................................ 9-3

Multiple Alarms ................................................... 5-3

Multiple Partition Access ................................... 9-2

No Alarm Response Type 23 ..............................4-7

Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 2-8) ............. 5-4

Number of Partitions ........................................ 5-12

OC or OPEN CIRCUIT ..........................................3-4

Off-Normal Report............................................. 10-4

One Man Walk Test........................................... 10-1

On-Line Control Functions ................................ 7-3

Open/Close Reporting .........................................9-2

Open/Close Reports by Exception........... 5-13, 6-3

Open/Close Schedule ......................................... 6-3

Open/Close Schedule Programming ................ 6-6

Open/Close Schedules

...................................

6-4

, 6-6

Open/Close Windows ......................................... 6-8

VISTA-128FBPN Installation and Setup Guide

Index-4

Operator Access Levels...................................... 7-1

Operator Codes Levels 3-5 ................................ 9-1

Output Device Control Commands...................B-1

Output Devices ................................................. 3-22

OUTPUT PGM........................................................4-3

overvoltage protection ...................................... 3-10

PABX Access Code ............................................ 5-3

Panel Linking ................................................2-1, 2-3

Panic Button or Speedkey ................................. 5-9

Partitioned System ............................................. 2-1

Partitioning....................................................1-2, 2-1

Perimeter Type 03................................................ 4-6

Peripherals Devices............................................ 1-1

Permanent Keypad Display Backlighting ...... 5-10

Phone Module Access Code............................ ix, 5-2

PLL out of Lock.................................................. 3-26

polling loop ....................................................... 3-15

Polling Loop Current Draw ............................... 3-28

Polling Loop Supervision ................................ 3-17

Power Failure .................................................... 10-4

Power Unattained .............................................. 3-26

Power-Up in Previous State............................... 5-3

Prevent Zone XXX Bypass................................. 5-4

Primary Format ................................................... 5-5

Primary Phone Number...................................... 5-4

Primary Subscriber’s Account Number ........... 5-3

Printer Baud Rate ............................................. 5-11

Printer Type....................................................... 5-11

Priority of Displays for Panel Linking............... 2-4

Program Modes................................................... 4-1

Program Notification Signal .............................. 5-7

Programming Commands..................................B-1

PROGRAMMING COMMANDS............................ 4-1

Programming Entry Errors ................................ 4-1

Programming Overview ..................................... 4-1

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields ... 4-2

Programming Scheduling Options ................... 6-4

Programming System-Wide Data Fields .......... 4-2

Quick Arm..................................................... 5-3, 9-1

Quick Exit..................................................... ix, 5-1

Random time ..........................................................6-8

Randomize AC Loss Report .............................. 5-2

RCVR SETUP ERROR........................................ 10-4

Real-Time Clock.................................................. 8-1

Recent Close ........................................................1-2

Refresh Feature .................................................. 6-7

Regulatory Agency Statements ........................ A-1

Relay commands ................................................ 6-8

Relay Control Commands ..................................B-2

Relay Timeout XXX Minutes ............................ 5-11

Relay Timeout YYY Seconds ........................... 5-11

Remote Keypad Sounder ................................. 3-24

Remote P/S Type 13 ............................................4-7

REPORT CODE PROG......................................... 4-3

Reporting Formats............................................ 3-10

Restrict Disarming .............................................. 6-1

RF Motion ............................................................3-21

RF Motion (RM) Type 02......................................4-8

RF Receiver Supervision Check-in Interval ..... 5-9

RF System Installation Advisories.................. 3-19

RF System Operation and Supervision ........... 3-18

RF Transmitter Check-in Interval ...................... 5-9

RF Transmitter Low Battery Reporting............. 5-9

RF Transmitter Low Battery Sound .................. 5-9

Ring Count............................................................7-3

Ring Detection Count ......................................... 5-5

RINGER EQUIVALENCE..................................... C-1

RJ31X ....................................................................3-9

RLY VOICE DESCR .............................................. 4-3

SCHEDULED CHANGE ........................................ 4-4

Scheduled Check-in

............................................

7-4

Scheduled Download ......................................... 7-4

Scheduling........................................................... 6-1

Scheduling Commands......................................B-1

Scheduling Menu Mode...................................... 6-4

Scheduling Menu Structure ............................... 6-4

Secondary Format .............................................. 5-5

Secondary Phone Number................................. 5-4

Secondary Subscriber Account Number ......... 5-7

Send Cancel If Alarm + Off............................... 5-11

serial number devices....................................3-16

Serial Number Polling Loop (DS) Type 08.........4-8

Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) Type 06 .........4-8

Sescoa/Radionics.................................................3-10

Sescoa/Radionics Select ................................... 5-5

Specifications......................................................C-1

Standard/Expanded Reporting Primary ........... 5-5

Standard/Expanded Reporting Secondary ...... 5-5

Standby Battery Size ........................................ 3-30

Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09 4-7

Supervised RF.....................................................3-21

Supervised RF (RF) Type 03 ...............................4-8

Supervision Pulses for Communicator .......... 5-13

Supervisory Messages ..................................... 10-4

Suppress Transmitter Supervision Sound..... 5-10

Swinger Suppression ......................................... 5-7

System Commands.............................................B-1

System Communication..................................... 1-2

System Events Notify ......................................... 5-1

SYSTEM LO BAT................................................10-4

System LoBat” ................................................... 10-1

Index

Index-5

System Messages............................................. 10-4

System Sensor EOLR-1 EOL Relay Module... 3-13

Tamper Supervision ......................................... 3-14

Telephone Line Connections ............................ 3-9

TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS.......A-3

Temporary Schedule .......................................... 6-3

Temporary Schedules ...................................... 6-12

Temporary Schedules Programming.............. 6-13

Test Report Interval............................................ 5-3

Testing The System.......................................... 10-1

Time Driven Events ............................................ 6-2

Time Driven Events Worksheet.......................... 6-7

Time Window Definitions................................... 6-2

Time Windows

.................................................

6-4

6-5

Time Windows Programming ............................ 6-5

Timed Events..........................................................6-4

Time-Driven Event Programming...................... 6-9

Time-Driven Events ............................................ 6-7

Time-Driven Events Programming.................... 6-7

TouchTone or Rotary Dial.................................. 5-3

TouchTone with Rotary Backup...................... 5-10

Transformer Connections................................ 3-27

Transmitter Battery Life ................................... 3-21

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode ............................ 10-3

Transmitter Input Types................................... 3-21

Transmitter Supervision .................................. 3-20

Trigger or RS232 Input ....................................... 5-2

Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05............ 4-6

Trouble Conditions........................................... 10-4

Trouble Messages ................................... 3-26, 10-4

Trouble/Supervisory Activation ........................ 3-8

Turning the System Over to the User ............. 10-5

UL Installation Requirements............................ A-1

UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ...........A-2

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar AlarmA-

UL609 Local Mercantile Premises/Local

Mercantile Safe & Vault .................................. A-2

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station

Fire....................................................................A-1

UL864/NFPA Local Fire ......................................A-1

UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION .............. 2-2

Unattended Download........................................ 7-1

Unattended Mode................................................ 5-6

Unsupervised Button RF (BR) Type 05 ............. 4-8

Unsupervised RF ................................................3-21

Unsupervised RF (UR) Type 04 ..........................4-8

Use Partition Descriptor................................... 5-13

User Access Codes ............................................ 9-1

User Code Authority Levels............................... 9-1

User Code Commands .......................................B-1

user code defaults ................................................ 9-1

User Code Rules ................................................. 9-2

User Scheduling Menu Mode........................... 6-14

Users .................................................................... 2-1

View Capabilities..................................................9-1

Vista-128FBPN Current Load............................ 3-29

Wire Run Length/Gauge...................................... 3-3

Wireless Keypad Assignment ......................... 5-10

Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect ..................... 5-10

Wireless System Commands.............................B-1

Wireless Zone Expansion ................................ 3-18

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ...................... 3-12

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ...................... 3-13

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

......................................................................... 3-11

Wiring the Alarm Output .....................................3-5

Wiring the Keypads ............................................ 3-3

Without Line Security.........................................A-2

World Wide Web Address.................................... 10-5

Yuasa...................................................................3-30

Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification ..................... 5-11

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration.......................... 3-13

Zone Bypass After Disarm................................. 5-7

Zone Defaults ...................................................... 4-4

Zone Index ........................................................... 4-4

Zone Input Type Definitions .............................. 4-8

Zone Number Designations ............................... 4-4

ZONE PROG .................................................. vii, 4-3

Zone Response Type Definitions ...................... 4-6

Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 1-8 .......... 5-6

Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 9, 10 and 14

........................................................................... 5-6

Zones ................................................................... 2-1

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or

other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari-

ety of reasons. For example:

• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or

disconnect an alarm warning device.

• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work with-

out power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in

properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.

• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if

the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.

• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.

• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not acti-

vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the

Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may

not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not

sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side

of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor de-

tector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No

smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by

carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable

materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire

and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning

to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.

• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their

installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams

of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion

or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.

Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical

system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the

ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection

performance can decrease.

• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the

other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-

rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear

the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.

Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.

• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or

temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.

• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect them-

selves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.

• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to

last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.

The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This

alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad

(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.

Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.

Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device

being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all

reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,

thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.

Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute

for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and

continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm

systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.

V128FBPN-SOC-V1

VISTA-128FBPN SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

TRANSFORMER

W/ENCLOSURE

ADEMCO No.1451

(supplied)

INPUT: 120VAC,

60HZ,

1.0A max. Connect to a

dedicated circuit.

See instructions for

proper earth ground

connections

12345678910 30

PROGRAMMABLE

AS KEYSWITCH LOOP

PROGRAMMABLE

AS TAMPER LOOP

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK

DETECTOR LOOP

2k (note 6)

Data in

Data out

BACK-UP LINE SEIZE

LED (GREEN)

Connect to main PCB

header J3 using ribbon

cable (supplied)

BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)

INTACT: 25V

CUT: 13V

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

MAIN PCB SHIELD

BACK-UP PHONE JACK

SEE TELCO

JACK SHOCK

WARNING

BELOW

Make connections using 4142TR cable

VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

(not supervised)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Make connections using

4142TR cable (supplied)

KEYPAD PORT #2

BELL 1

(WHITE)

BELL 2

(WHITE)

BLK + RED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE

TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:

ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

BELL

HORN

BELL

HORN

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

TO OTHER DEVICES

2k 2k 2k

ZONE 4

(NOTE 5)

AC WIRING IS

SUPERVISED

BELL 1 BELL 2

ALARM POLARITY SHOWN

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

AUX RELAY (FORM C)

programmable response

(not supervised)

Contact Rating:

28VAC/VDC, 2.8A

resistive loads

SPARE AUX

POWR #1

Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max

lead acid batteries using cables supplied.

See instructions for required capacity.

Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery

normally need not be replaced for

at least 3 yrs.

J4 KEYPAD PORT #2

See instr. regarding port #2 use

1. GROUND (to keypad black wire)

4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire)

5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire)

Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,

400mA max. See note 1

7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire)

(BLUE)

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

MAIN DIALER ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD

INTACT:25V

CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH

GROUND SCREW

(wire to main PCB

terminal #30)

J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS

See instructions for trigger use and programming

(default functions shown)

1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)

2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)

3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)

4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)

5. OUT 2 (FIRE)

6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)

7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)

8. GROUND

9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)

RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:

LOW: 2K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX

OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K

Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using

4 standoffs (supplied)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BATTERY TABS

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

RJ31X

MAIN

PHONE JACK

BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY

INPUT

OUTPUT

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM

SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-

QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION

SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH

THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.

THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL

SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A

POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.

POLLING

LOOP

TO PREVENT

RISK OF

ELECTRICAL

SHOCK,

DISCONNECT

TELCO

JACK BEFORE

SERVICING

THIS PANEL

Connect

RJ31X using

cable supplied.

Supervision is

programmable

OUTPUT: 18VAC

72VA

BLACKWH

RJ31X

(connect using supplied cable)

Supervision is programmable

EARTH GROUND

• Ratings for zones 1,2:

- 2mA max for all smoke det.

(up to 16 detectors of the type

specified in the instructions can

be used)

- UL compatibility ID: A

TRNSFMR

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

The 5140DLM Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

28 29

The Main Dialer Complies with

FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

FOR DRY, INDOOR USE ONLY

The impedance at which a ground

fault is annunciated is 1,000 ohms

Special Application Circuit

Connect Only Fire Keypads to

AUX PWR # 2.

Maximum Loop Impedance is 1.17 ohms.

Each output is Class B and may be selected for Style Y

supervision or no supervision. (See main PCB jumpers

W1, W4 and #93 Menu Mode.)

FIRE CKTS: Use only devices listed as Special Application

NAC Devices in Installation and Setup Guide. Supervise

using 2k EOLR. Use polarized sounding devices and

backup batteries.

BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd. EOLRs not req'd.

May use non polarized devices.

1.7A max. See note 1, see instructions for compatible devices.

NOTES

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT THE OUTPUT

OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER AND BACKUP BATTERIES.

ALL POWER-LIMITED WIRING MUST BE

SEPARATED FROM NON-POWER LIMITED

AND HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING BY 1/4 INCH

(6.4 mm)

For commercial fire, bell timeout must be a minimum of

6 minutes.

Use only 14-22 AWG wire.

2k EOLR is Ademco Model EOL20.

No more than one (1) wire per terminal may

be connected.

See instructions on setting addresses & for

max # of keypads and wire run length

restrictions.

•All zones are Class B and provide Style B supervision

• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):

- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max

- Other zones: 300 ohms max

• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)

This equipment should be installed in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association's Standard 72

(National Fire Protection Assoc., Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA. 02169). Printed information describing

proper installation, operation, testing, maintenance and repair service is to be provided with this equipment.

This unit includes a Fire Alarm Verification feature that will result in a delay of

the System Alarm Signal from the indicated Fire Alarm circuits. The total delay

(Control Unit plus Smoke Detectors) shall not exceed 30 seconds. No other

Smoke Detector shall be connected to these circuits unless approved by the

local authority having jurisdiction.

COMMERCIAL FIRE AND BURGLAR ALARM PROTECTED PREMISES CONTROL UNIT

WARNING:

TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE:

Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm, DACT, Radio Frequency (RF) and Multiplex.

UL Listed local control (non-coded). UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with

5140DLM back-up dialer module. Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

N.C.

N.O.

SMOKE

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

N.C.

N.O.

SMOKE

18 19

ZONE 1 ZONE 2

1511 12 13 14 16

KEYPAD PORT #1

REMOTE KEYPADS:

6160, 6160CR-2,

SEE NOTE 2

Red Blk Grn Yel

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

21 22

20 23 24

ZONE 3

2726

ZONE 7 ZONE 8ZONE 5 ZONE 6

FOR INSTRUCTIONS

SEE 800-06306,

DATED 4/10

WARNING:

ASSEMBLED

IN MEXICO

• Voltage rating, all zones - 12VDC.

• Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.

N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

ZONE 1-8 NOTES

Polling Loop: Class B, Style 3.

Polling Loop Ratings:

(supervised) 128mA max. See note 1.

8-11 VDC

20 Ohms Max. Impedance

See instructions for compatible devices and for max

wire run length. Fire and Burglary devices on the

polling loop must be isolated by use of a 4297 or

VSI module. Refer to instructions for specific examples.

- Maximum fire loop capacitance

is 100 uf.

Smoke DetectorControl Unit Delay, SecondsCircuit (zone)

Model Delay, Seconds

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED.

8 Seconds

Zone 2

Aux Relay

Zone 1

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS

DO NOT CUT

NOTE: J2 Voltage triggers can only be used with the

4146 keyswitch for fire applications. Trigger Wiring

must be run in conduit within 20ft of the Control Panel.

The combined standby current drawn from

aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2 and polling loop

cannot exceed 1.0A (for Canada, 650mA).

The combined alarm current drawn from aux

pwr #1, aux pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and

bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A

(for Canada, 1.95A).

AUXILIARY POWER #1

1.0A MAX (STANDBY) (For Canada 650mA)

1.7A MAX (ALARM) (See Note 1.)

Max. Impedance: 0.6 Ohms

Special Application Circuit.

Fire & Burglary Devices on the ECP Bus

must be isolated using an ECP Isolator.

Refer to Instructions for specific examples.

ECP Bus: Max. Line Impedance: 50 Ohms

Special Application Circuit.

If supervision of the batteries is required, they

should be connected to the Battery Sense

Module. The Battery Sense Module is then

connected to the panel. Refer to the Battery

Sense Module instructions for connections.

(SEE NOTE 7)

ZONE INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

ZONE 8

ZONES 2-7 EOLR CONFIG.

Maximum Loop Current (short loop): 7.4mA

Maximum Loop Voltage (open loop): 13.3VDC

Loop Short: 0V - 1.5V - 300 ohms total resistance)

Loop Normal: 4.2 - 6.8V, 1.2k - 2.6k

Loop Open: 7.2V - 13.3V, 3k -

Maximum Loop I: 9mA

Maximum Loop V: 13.3VDC

Loop Short: 0 - 2.2V - (0 - 300 ohms)

Loop Normal: 5 - 9V (0.9k - 3.4k)

Loop Open: 10V - 13.3V, 3.8k -

ZONE 9

Maximum Loop I: 4mA

Maximum Loop V: 13.3V

Loop Short: NA

Loop Normal: 0 - 1.5V (0 ohms - 400 ohms)

Loop Open: 5.3V, 2.2k -

Ê800

Ê800Ê800

Ê800-

-06306$Š

06306$Š06306$Š

06306$Š

800-06306 4/10 Rev. B

For the latest warranty information, please go to:

www.honeywell.com/security/hsc/resources/wa

2 Corporate Center Drive, Suite 100

P.O. Box 9040, Melville, NY 11747

www.honeywell.com/security

800 06306_V128FBPN Ii RevB Vista 128fbpn Installation Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation